RECORD OF CHANGES

CHANGE 

NUMBER

DATE OF 

CHANGE

DATE 

EFFECTIVE

BY WHOM 

ENTERED

001 17NOV2014 / 

22NOV2014 

17NOV2014/ 

22NOV2014 LNM 46-14 / NTM 48-14 

002 8DEC2014 / 

20DEC2014 

8DEC2014 / 

20DEC2014 LNM 49-14 / NTM 51-14 

003 24AUG2015 / 

7SEPT2015 

24AUG2015 / 

7SEPT2015 LNM 35-15 / NTM 37-15 

004 29SEPT2015 / 

10OCT2015 

29SEPT2015 

/ 10OCT2015 LNM 39-15 / NTM 41-15 

005 30NOV2015 / 

12DEC2015 

30NOV2015 

/ 12DEC2015 LNM 48-15 / NTM 50-15 

006 28JUL2107 / 

24JAN2018 

17FEB2018 / 

14FEB2108 LNM 07-18 / NTM 07-18 

 
CONTENTS ‡

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... i 

LEGAL CITATIONS ............................................................................................................. iii 

CONVERSION TABLE ....................................................................................................... iv 

NAVIGATION RULES AND REGULATIONS 

 INTERNATIONAL AND INLAND NAVIGATION RULES 

PART A|SUBPART A—GENERAL 

Rule 1—Application ................................................................................................ 2 

Rule 2—Responsibility ............................................................................................ 4 

Rule 3—General Definitions ................................................................................. 6 

PART B|SUBPART B—STEERING AND SAILING RULES 

 Section I—Conduct of Vessels in Any Condition of Visibility 

Rule 4—Application .............................................................................................. 10 

Rule 5—Look-out .................................................................................................. 10 

Rule 6—Safe Speed ................................................................................................ 12 

Rule 7—Risk of Collision ..................................................................................... 14 

Rule 8—Action to Avoid Collision .................................................................... 16 

Rule 9—Narrow Channels ................................................................................... 18 

Rule 10—Traffic Separation Schemes .................................................................. 20 

 Section II—Conduct of Vessels in Sight of One Another 

Rule 11—Application ............................................................................................. 22 

Rule 12—Sailing Vessels ........................................................................................ 22 

Rule 13—Overtaking .............................................................................................. 24 

Rule 14—Head-on Situation ................................................................................. 24 

Rule 15—Crossing Situation ................................................................................. 26 

Rule 16—Action by Give-way Vessel ................................................................. 26 

Rule 17—Action by Stand-on Vessel .................................................................. 26 

Rule 18—Responsibilities Between Vessels ....................................................... 28 

 Section III—Conduct of Vessels in Restricted Visibility 

Rule 19—Conduct of Vessels in Restricted Visibility ...................................... 30 

PART C|SUBPART C—LIGHTS AND SHAPES 

Rule 20—Application ............................................................................................. 32 

Rule 21—Definitions .............................................................................................. 34 

Rule 22—Visibility of Lights ................................................................................. 36 

Rule 23—Power-driven Vessels Underway ........................................................ 38 

Rule 24—Towing and Pushing ............................................................................. 46 

Rule 25—Sailing Vessels Underway and Vessels Under Oars ....................... 60 

Rule 26—Fishing Vessels ....................................................................................... 68 

Rule 27—Vessels Not Under Command or Restricted in 

Their Ability to Maneuver ................................................................... 74

 

‡ Footnotes proceeded by the double-dagger (‡) symbol indicates clarifications added by the U.S. Coast 

Guard Office of Navigation Systems; and, are not found in the original source material. 
PART C|SUBPART C—LIGHTS AND SHAPES, CONTINUED 

Rule 28—Vessels Constrained by Their Draft / [Reserved] .......................... 86 

Rule 29—Pilot Vessels ........................................................................................... 88 

Rule 30—Anchored Vessels and Vessels Aground / Anchored vessels, 

aground and moored barges ............................................................... 90 

Rule 31—Seaplanes ................................................................................................. 96 

PART D|SUBPART D—SOUND AND LIGHT SIGNALS

Rule 32—Definitions .............................................................................................. 96 

Rule 33—Equipment for Sound Signals ............................................................. 96 

Rule 34—Maneuvering and Warning Signals .................................................... 98 

Rule 35—Sound Signals in Restricted Visibility .............................................. 102 

Rule 36—Signals to Attract Attention .............................................................. 104 

Rule 37—Distress Signals .................................................................................... 106 

PART E|SUBPART E—EXEMPTIONS

Rule 38—Exemptions .......................................................................................... 108 

 

ANNEXES - INTERNATIONAL AND INLAND NAVIGATION RULES 

Annex I — Positioning and Technical Details of Lights and Shapes ..... 112 

Annex II — Additional Signals for Fishing Vessels 

Fishing in Close Proximity / [Reserved] ................................. 126 

Annex III — Technical Details of Sound Signal Appliances ...................... 128 

Annex IV — Distress Signals ............................................................................. 134 

Annex V — [Blank] / Pilot Rules .................................................................... 137 

INTERPRETATIVE RULES 

Composite Units, Moored Vessels, and Unmanned Barges ................................... 138 

PENALTY PROVISIONS ................................................................................................. 140 

IMPLEMENTING RULES 

Certificate of Alternative Compliance—International & Inland ........................... 142 

Waters Upon Which Inland Rules 9(a)(ii), 14(d), 15(b) and 24(i) Apply ............. 145 

COLREGS DEMARCATION LINES .......................................................................... 146 

OPERATIONS OF VESSELS GENERALLY 

Penalties for Negligent Operations and Interfering with Safe Operations ......... 158 

Duties Related to Marine Casualty Assistance and Information ........................... 159 

Post Serious Marine Casualty Alcohol Testing ......................................................... 160 

Duty to Provide Assistance at Sea ............................................................................... 160 

Injunctions ........................................................................................................................ 160 

Vessel Reporting Requirements ................................................................................... 160 

Limitation of Liability for Coast Guard Vessel Traffic Service Pilots .................. 161 

VESSEL BRIDGE-TO-BRIDGE RADIOTELEPHONE REGULATIONS 162 

VESSEL TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ......................................................................... 167 

Table 161.12(c) - VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI,

Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring ......................................................... 187 
i

INTRODUCTION 

International Rules 

The International Rules in this book were formalized in the Convention on 

the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, and became 

effective on July 15, 1977. The Rules (commonly called 72 COLREGS) are part 

of the Convention, and vessels flying the flags of states ratifying the treaty are 

bound to the Rules. The United States has ratified this treaty and all United States 

flag vessels must adhere to these Rules where applicable. President Gerald R. 

Ford proclaimed 72 COLREGS and the Congress adopted them as the 

International Navigational Rules Act of 1977. 

The 72 COLREGS were developed by the Inter-Governmental Maritime 

Consultative Organization (IMCO) which in May 1982 was renamed the 

International Maritime Organization (IMO). In November 1981, IMO’s 

Assembly adopted 55 amendments to the 72 COLREGS which became effective 

on June 16, 1983. The IMO also adopted 9 more amendments which became 

effective on June 29, 1989. A single amendment became effective March 19, 1991. 

In 1993 8 amendments were adopted by the IMO which entered into force in 

1995. The IMO adopted 9 amendments which entered into force November 29, 

2003. Lastly, a single amendment was adopted which updated the Distress signals 

and entered into force on December 1, 2009. The International Rules in this book 

contain these amendments. 

These Rules are applicable on waters outside of established navigational lines 

of demarcation. The lines are called COLREGS Demarcation Lines and delineate 

those waters upon which mariners shall comply with the Inland and International 

Rules. COLREGS Demarcation Lines are contained in this book. 
ii

INTRODUCTION 

Inland Regulations 

The Inland Rules in this book replace the old Inland Rules, Western Rivers 

Rules, Great Lakes Rules, their respective pilot rules and interpretive rules, and 

parts of the Motorboat Act of 1940. Many of the old navigation rules were 

originally enacted in the 1800’s. Occasionally, provisions were added to cope with 

the increasing complexities of water transportation. Eventually, the navigation 

rules for United States inland waterways became such a confusing patchwork of 

requirements that in the 1960’s several attempts were made to revise and simplify 

them. These attempts were not successful. 

Following the signing of the Convention on the International Regulations for 

Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, a new effort was made to unify and update the 

various inland navigation rules. This effort culminated in the enactment of the 

Inland Navigational Rules Act of 1980. This legislation sets out Rules 1 through 

38 - the main body of the Rules. The five Annexes were published as regulations. 

It is important to note that with the exception of Annex V to the Inland Rules, 

the International and Inland Rules and Annexes are very similar in both content 

and format. 

The effective date for the Inland Navigation Rules was December 24, 1981, 

except for the Great Lakes where the effective date was March 1, 1983. 

On May 17, 2010 the US Coast Guard published a Final Rule which placed 

the Inland Navigational Rules into the Code of Federal Regulations. This move 

was in accordance with the Coast Guard and Maritime Transportation Act of 

2004, which repealed the Inland Navigation Rules as they appeared in United 

States Code. 

This Handbook supersedes Commandant Instruction M16672.2D, Navigation 

Rules: International−Inland. It maintains the same format and provides additional 

and updated content. Not all U.S. Navigation Regulations found in Title 33 of 

the Code of Federal Regulations are contained in this handbook. 
iii

LEGAL CITATIONS 

72 COLREGS 

International Navigational Rules ................................................. Public Law 95-75; 

Act of 1977 ........................................................................................ 91 Stat 308; 

 ....................................................................................................... 33 U.S.C. 1601-1608 

COLREGS Demarcation Lines .............................................................. 33 CFR 80 

72 COLREGS: Implementing Rules ...................................................... 33 CFR 81 

72 COLREGS: Interpretative Rules ....................................................... 33 CFR 82 

Amendments to 72 COLREGS Effective June 1, 1983 .................. 48 FR 28634 

COLREGS Penalty Provisions ......................................................... 33 U.S.C. 1608 

INLAND RULES 

Inland Navigational Rules Act of 1980 ................................... Public Law 96-591; 

 ..................................................................................................................... 94 Stat 3415; 

 ........................................................................................................................ 33 CFR 83 

Annex I: Positioning and Technical 

Details of Lights and Shapes ........................................................... 33 CFR 84 

Annex II: Additional Signals for Fishing in Close Proximity ............ 33 CFR 85 

Annex III: Technical Details of Sound Signal Appliances ................. 33 CFR 86 

Annex IV: Distress Signals ....................................................................... 33 CFR 87 

Annex V: Pilot Rules ................................................................................. 33 CFR 88 

Inland Navigation Rules: Implementing Rules ..................................... 33 CFR 89 

Inland Navigation Rules: Interpretative Rules ..................................... 33 CFR 90 

Boundary Lines ............................................................................................. 46 CFR 7 

Inland Rules Penalty Provisions ........................................................ 33 U.S.C. 2072 

VESSEL NAVIGATON REGULATIONS 

Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act ........................... Public Law 92-63; 

 .............................................................................................................. 85 Stat.164; 

 .............................................................................................. 33 U.S.C. 1201-1208 

Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regulations ........................ 33 CFR 26 

Other FCC Regulations Pertaining to 

Maritime Communications ..................................... 47 CFR 80.1001-80.1023 

Vessel Traffic Management ................................................................... 33 CFR 161 

OPERATIONS OF VESSELS GENERALLY 

Penalties for Negligent Operations ............................................... 33 U.S.C. 2302 

Duties Related to Marine Casualty ................................................ 33 U.S.C. 2303 

Duty to Provide Assistance at Sea ................................................. 33 U.S.C. 2304 

Vessel Reporting Requirements ..................................................... 33 U.S.C. 2306 
iv

CONVERSION TABLE 

Conversion of Metric to U.S. Customary/Imperial Units 

U.S. Customary/ 

Metric Measure Imperial Measure 

 (approximately) 

1,000 Meters (M) ................................................................... 3,280.8 ft. 

 ...... 500 M ............................................................................... 1,640.4 ft. 

 ...... 200 M .................................................................................. 656.2 ft. 

 ...... 150 M .................................................................................. 492.1 ft. 

 ...... 100 M .................................................................................. 328.1 ft. 

 ........ 75 M .................................................................................. 246.1 ft. 

 ........ 60 M .................................................................................. 196.8 ft. 

 ........ 50 M .................................................................................. 164.0 ft. 

 ........ 25 M .................................................................................... 82.0 ft. 

 ........ 20 M .................................................................................... 65.6 ft. 

 ........ 12 M .................................................................................... 39.4 ft. 

 ........ 10 M .................................................................................... 32.8 ft. 

 ...........8 M .................................................................................... 26.2 ft. 

 ...........7 M .................................................................................... 23.0 ft. 

 ...........6 M .................................................................................... 19.7 ft. 

 ...........5 M .................................................................................... 16.4 ft. 

 ....... 4.5 M .................................................................................... 14.8 ft. 

 ....... 4.0 M .................................................................................... 13.1 ft. 

 ....... 3.5 M .................................................................................... 11.5 ft. 

 ....... 2.5 M ...................................................................................... 8.2 ft. 

 ....... 2.0 M ...................................................................................... 6.6 ft. 

 ....... 1.5 M ...................................................................................... 4.9 ft. 

 ....... 1.0 M ...................................................................................... 3.3 ft. 

 ...... 0.9 M ................................................................................... 35.4 in. 

 ...... 0.6 M ................................................................................... 23.6 in. 

 ...... 0.5 M ................................................................................... 19.7 in. 

300 Millimeters (mm) ............................................................... 11.8 in. 

200 mm .......................................................................................... 7.9 in. 
1

NAVIGATION RULES 

INTERNATIONAL—INLAND
2

—INTERNATIONAL— 

General 

PART A—GENERAL 

Rule 1 

Application 

(a) These Rules shall apply to all vessels upon the high seas and in all waters 

connected therewith navigable by seagoing vessels. 

(b) Nothing in these Rules shall interfere with the operation of special rules 

made by an appropriate authority for roadsteads, harbors, rivers, lakes or inland 

waterways connected with the high seas and navigable by seagoing vessels. Such 

special rules shall conform as closely as possible to these Rules. 

(c) Nothing in these Rules shall interfere with the operation of any special rules 

made by the Government of any State with respect to additional station or signal 

lights, shapes or whistle signals for ships of war and vessels proceeding under 

convoy, or with respect to additional station or signal lights or shapes for fishing 

vessels engaged in fishing as a fleet. These additional station or signal lights, 

shapes or whistle signals shall, so far as possible, be such that they cannot be 

mistaken for any light, shape or signal authorized elsewhere under these Rules ‡. 

(d) Traffic separation schemes may be adopted by the Organization for the 

purpose of these Rules. 

 

‡ Submarines may display, as a distinctive means of identification, an intermittent flashing amber 

(yellow) beacon with a sequence of one flash per second for three (3) seconds followed by a three 

(3) second off-period (32 CFR 707.7). Other special rules made by the Secretary of the Navy with 

respect to additional station and signal lights are found in Part 706 of Title 32, Code of Federal 

Regulations (32 CFR 706).
3

—INLAND— 

General 

33 CFR 83 

SUBPART A—GENERAL 

Rule 1 

Application 

§ 83.01 

(a) These Rules apply to all vessels upon the inland waters of the United States, 

and to vessels of the United States on the Canadian waters of the Great Lakes to 

the extent that there is no conflict with Canadian law. The regulations in this 

subchapter (subchapter E, 33 CFR parts 83 through 90) have preemptive effect 

over State or local regulation within the same field. 

(b) (i)These Rules constitute special rules made by an appropriate authority 

within the meaning of Rule 1(b) of the International Regulations for 

Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, including annexes currently in force for 

the United States (“International Regulations”). 

(ii) All vessels complying with the construction and equipment 

requirements of the International Regulations are considered to be in 

compliance with these Rules. 

(c) Nothing in these Rules shall interfere with the operation of any special rules 

made by the Secretary of the Navy with respect to additional station or signal 

lights and shapes or whistle signals for ships of war and vessels proceeding under 

convoy, or by the Secretary with respect to additional station or signal lights and 

shapes for fishing vessels engaged in fishing as a fleet. These additional station or 

signal lights and shapes or whistle signals shall, so far as possible, be such that 

they cannot be mistaken for any light, shape, or signal authorized elsewhere under 

these Rules. Notice of such special rules shall be published in the Federal Register 

and, after the effective date specified in such notice, they shall have effect as if 

they were a part of these Rules ‡. 

(d) Traffic separation schemes may be established for the purposes of these 

Rules. Vessel traffic service regulations may be in effect in certain areas. 

 

‡ Submarines may display, as a distinctive means of identification, an intermittent flashing amber 

(yellow) beacon with a sequence of one flash per second for three (3) seconds followed by a three 

(3) second off-period (32 CFR 707.7). Other special rules made by the Secretary of the Navy with 

respect to additional station and signal lights are found in Part 706 of Title 32, Code of Federal 

Regulations (32 CFR 706).
4

—INTERNATIONAL— 

General 

Rule 1—CONTINUED 

(e) Whenever the Government concerned shall have determined that a vessel 

of special construction or purpose cannot comply fully with the provisions of any 

of these Rules with respect to the number, position, range or arc of visibility of 

lights or shapes, as well as to the disposition and characteristics of sound-signaling 

appliances, such vessel shall comply with such other provisions in regard to the 

number, position, range or arc of visibility of lights or shapes, as well as to the 

disposition and characteristics of sound-signaling appliances, as her Government 

shall have determined to be the closest possible compliance with these Rules in 

respect to that vessel. 

Rule 2 

Responsibility 

(a) Nothing in these Rules shall exonerate any vessel, or the owner, master or 

crew thereof, from the consequences of any neglect to comply with these Rules 

or of the neglect of any precaution which may be required by the ordinary practice 

of seamen, or by the special circumstances of the case. 

(b) In construing and complying with these Rules due regard shall be had to 

all dangers of navigation and collision and to any special circumstances, including 

the limitations of the vessels involved, which may make a departure from these 

Rules necessary to avoid immediate danger. 
5

—INLAND— 

General 

Rule 1—CONTINUED 

(e) Whenever the Secretary determines that a vessel or class of vessels of special 

construction or purpose cannot comply fully with the provisions of any of these 

Rules with respect to the number, position, range, or arc of visibility of lights or 

shapes, as well as to the disposition and characteristics of sound-signaling 

appliances, the vessel shall comply with such other provisions in regard to the 

number, position, range, or arc of visibility of lights or shapes, as well as to the 

disposition and characteristics of sound-signaling appliances, as the Secretary 

shall have determined to be the closest possible compliance with these Rules. The 

Secretary may issue a certificate of alternative compliance for a vessel or class of 

vessels specifying the closest possible compliance with these Rules. The Secretary 

of the Navy shall make these determinations and issue certificates of alternative 

compliance for vessels of the Navy. 

(f) The Secretary may accept a certificate of alternative compliance issued by a 

contracting party to the International Regulations if it determines that the 

alternative compliance standards of the contracting party are substantially the 

same as those of the United States. 

(g) The operator of each self-propelled vessel 12 meters or more in length shall 

carry, on board and maintain for ready reference, a copy of these Rules. 

Rule 2 

Responsibility 

§ 83.02 

(a) Nothing in these Rules shall exonerate any vessel, or the owner, master, or 

crew thereof, from the consequences of any neglect to comply with these Rules 

or of the neglect of any precaution which may be required by the ordinary practice 

of seamen, or by the special circumstances of the case. 

(b) In construing and complying with these Rules due regard shall be had to all 

dangers of navigation and collision and to any special circumstances, including 

the limitations of the vessels involved, which may make a departure from these 

Rules necessary to avoid immediate danger. 
6

—INTERNATIONAL— 

General 

Rule 3 

General Definitions 

For the purpose of these Rules, except where the context otherwise requires: 

(a) The word vessel includes every description of water craft, including nondisplacement craft, WIG craft and seaplanes, used or capable of being used as a 

means of transportation on water. 

(b) The term power-driven vessel means any vessel propelled by machinery. 

(c) The term sailing vessel means any vessel under sail provided that propelling 

machinery, if fitted, is not being used. 

(d) The term vessel engaged in fishing means any vessel fishing with nets, lines, 

trawls or other fishing apparatus which restrict maneuverability, but does not 

include a vessel fishing with trolling lines or other fishing apparatus which do not 

restrict maneuverability. 

(e) The word seaplane includes any aircraft designed to maneuver on the water. 

(f) The term vessel not under command means a vessel which through some 

exceptional circumstance is unable to maneuver as required by these Rules and is 

therefore unable to keep out of the way of another vessel. 

(g) The term vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver means a vessel which from 

the nature of her work is restricted in her ability to maneuver as required by these 

Rules and is therefore unable to keep out of the way of another vessel. The term 

vessels restricted in their ability to maneuver shall include but not be limited to: 

(i) a vessel engaged in laying, servicing or picking up a navigation mark, 

submarine cable or pipeline; 

(ii) a vessel engaged in dredging, surveying or underwater operations; 

(iii) a vessel engaged in replenishment or transferring persons, provisions 

or cargo while underway; 

(iv) a vessel engaged in the launching or recovery of aircraft; 

(v) a vessel engaged in mine clearance operations; 

(vi) a vessel engaged in a towing operation such as severely restricts the 

towing vessel and her tow in their ability to deviate from their course. 

(h) The term vessel constrained by her draft means a power-driven vessel which, 

because of her draft in relation to the available depth and width of navigable water 

is severely restricted in her ability to deviate from the course she is following. 
7

—INLAND— 

General 

Rule 3 

General definitions 

§ 83.03 

For the purpose of these Rules and Subchapter E ‡, except where the context 

otherwise requires: 

(a) The word vessel includes every description of water craft, including nondisplacement craft, WIG craft and seaplanes, used or capable of being used as a 

means of transportation on water. 

(b) The term power-driven vessel means any vessel propelled by machinery. 

(c) The term sailing vessel means any vessel under sail provided that propelling 

machinery, if fitted, is not being used. 

(d) The term vessel engaged in fishing means any vessel fishing with nets, lines, 

trawls, or other fishing apparatus which restricts maneuverability, but does not 

include a vessel fishing with trolling lines or other fishing apparatus which do not 

restrict maneuverability. 

(e) The word seaplane includes any aircraft designed to maneuver on the water. 

(f) The term vessel not under command means a vessel which through some 

exceptional circumstance is unable to maneuver as required by these Rules and is 

therefore unable to keep out of the way of another vessel. 

(g) The term vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver means a vessel which, from 

the nature of her work, is restricted in her ability to maneuver as required by these 

Rules and is therefore unable to keep out of the way of another vessel. The term 

vessels restricted in their ability to maneuver include, but are not limited to: 

(i) A vessel engaged in laying, servicing or picking up a navigation mark, 

submarine cable, or pipeline; 

(ii) a vessel engaged in dredging, surveying, or underwater operations; 

(iii) a vessel engaged in replenishment or transferring persons, provisions, 

or cargo while underway; 

(iv) a vessel engaged in the launching or recovery of aircraft; 

(v) a vessel engaged in mine clearance operations; 

(vi) a vessel engaged in a towing operation such as severely restricts the 

towing vessel and her tow in their ability to deviate from their course. 

(h) [Reserved] 

 

‡

 Parts 83-90 of Title 33 Code of Federal Regulations. 
8

—INTERNATIONAL— 

General 

Rule 3—CONTINUED 

(i) The word underway means that a vessel is not at anchor, or made fast to the 

shore, or aground. 

(j) The words length and breadth of a vessel mean her length overall and greatest 

breadth. 

(k) Vessels shall be deemed to be in sight of one another only when one can 

be observed visually from the other. 

(l) The term restricted visibility means any condition in which visibility is restricted 

by fog, mist, falling snow, heavy rainstorms, sandstorms or any other similar 

causes.

(m) The term Wing-In-Ground (WIG) craft means a multimodal craft which, in 

its main operational mode, flies in close proximity to the surface by utilizing 

surface-effect action. 
9

—INLAND— 

General 

Rule 3—CONTINUED 

(i) The word underway means that a vessel is not at anchor, or made fast to the 

shore, or aground. 

(j) The words length and breadth of a vessel mean her length overall and greatest 

breadth. 

(k) Vessels shall be deemed to be in sight of one another only when one can 

be observed visually from the other. 

(l) The term restricted visibility means any condition in which visibility is restricted 

by fog, mist, falling snow, heavy rainstorms, sandstorms, or any other similar 

causes. 

(m) The term Wing-In-Ground (WIG) craft means a multimodal craft which, in 

its main operational mode, flies in close proximity to the surface by utilizing 

surface-effect action. 

(n) Western Rivers means the Mississippi River, its tributaries, South Pass, and 

Southwest Pass, to the navigational demarcation lines dividing the high seas from 

harbors, rivers, and other inland waters of the United States, and the Port AllenMorgan City Alternate Route, and that part of the Atchafalaya River above its 

junction with the Port Allen-Morgan City Alternate Route including the Old 

River and the Red River. 

(o) Great Lakes means the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary 

waters including the Calumet River as far as the Thomas J. O’Brien Lock and 

Controlling Works (between mile 326 and 327), the Chicago River as far as the 

east side of the Ashland Avenue Bridge (between mile 321 and 322), and the Saint 

Lawrence River as far east as the lower exit of Saint Lambert Lock. 

(p) Secretary means the Secretary of the Department in which the Coast Guard 

is operating. 

(q) Inland Waters means the navigable waters of the United States shoreward of 

the navigational demarcation lines dividing the high seas from harbors, rivers, and 

other inland waters of the United States and the waters of the Great Lakes on the 

United States side of the International Boundary. 

(r) Inland Rules or Rules means these Inland Navigational Rules and the annexes 

thereto, which govern the conduct of vessels and specify the lights, shapes, and 

sound signals that apply on inland waters. 

(s) International Regulations means the International Regulations for Preventing 

Collisions at Sea, 1972, including annexes currently in force for the United States. 
10

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

PART B—STEERING AND SAILING RULES 

Section I—Conduct of Vessels in Any 

Condition of Visibility 

Rule 4 

Application 

Rules in this Section apply to any condition of visibility. 

Rule 5 

Look-out 

Every vessel shall at all times maintain a proper look-out by sight and hearing 

as well as by all available means appropriate in the prevailing circumstances and 

conditions so as to make a full appraisal of the situation and of the risk of 

collision. 
11

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

SUBPART B—STEERING AND SAILING 

RULES 

Conduct of Vessels in Any 

Condition of Visibility 

Rule 4 

Application 

§ 83.04 

Rules 4 through 10 (§§ 83.04 through 83.10) apply in any condition of 

visibility. 

Rule 5 

Look-out 

§ 83.05 

Every vessel shall at all times maintain a proper look-out by sight and hearing 

as well as by all available means appropriate in the prevailing circumstances and 

conditions so as to make a full appraisal of the situation and of the risk of 

collision. 
12

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 6 

Safe Speed 

Every vessel shall at all times proceed at a safe speed so that she can take proper 

and effective action to avoid collision and be stopped within a distance 

appropriate to the prevailing circumstances and conditions. 

In determining a safe speed the following factors shall be among those taken 

into account: 

(a) By all vessels: 

(i) the state of visibility; 

(ii) the traffic density including concentrations of fishing vessels or any 

other vessels; 

(iii) the maneuverability of the vessel with special reference to stopping 

distance and turning ability in the prevailing conditions; 

(iv) at night, the presence of background light such as from shore lights or 

from back scatter of her own lights; 

(v) the state of wind, sea and current, and the proximity of navigational 

hazards; 

(vi) the draft in relation to the available depth of water. 

(b) Additionally, by vessels with operational radar: 

(i) the characteristics, efficiency and limitations of the radar equipment; 

(ii) any constraints imposed by the radar range scale in use; 

(iii) the effect on radar detection of the sea state, weather and other sources 

of interference; 

(iv) the possibility that small vessels, ice and other floating objects may not 

be detected by radar at an adequate range; 

(v) the number, location and movement of vessels detected by radar; 

(vi) the more exact assessment of the visibility that may be possible when 

radar is used to determine the range of vessels or other objects in the 

vicinity. 
13

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 6 

Safe speed 

§ 83.06 

Every vessel shall at all times proceed at a safe speed so that she can take proper 

and effective action to avoid collision and be stopped within a distance 

appropriate to the prevailing circumstances and conditions. 

In determining a safe speed the following factors shall be among those taken 

into account: 

(a) By all vessels: 

(i) The state of visibility; 

(ii) The traffic density including concentration of fishing vessels or any 

other vessels; 

(iii) The maneuverability of the vessel with special reference to stopping 

distance and turning ability in the prevailing conditions; 

(iv) At night, the presence of background light such as from shore lights or 

from back scatter of her own lights; 

(v) The state of wind, sea, and current, and the proximity of navigational 

hazards; 

(vi) The draft in relation to the available depth of water. 

(b) Additionally, by vessels with operational radar: 

(i) The characteristics, efficiency and limitations of the radar equipment; 

(ii) Any constraints imposed by the radar range scale in use; 

(iii) The effect on radar detection of the sea state, weather, and other 

sources of interference; 

(iv) The possibility that small vessels, ice and other floating objects may not 

be detected by radar at an adequate range; 

(v) The number, location, and movement of vessels detected by radar; 

(vi) The more exact assessment of the visibility that may be possible when 

radar is used to determine the range of vessels or other objects in the 

vicinity. 
14

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 7 

Risk of Collision 

(a) Every vessel shall use all available means appropriate to the prevailing 

circumstances and conditions to determine if risk of collision exists. If there is 

any doubt such risk shall be deemed to exist. 

(b) Proper use shall be made of radar equipment if fitted and operational, 

including long-range scanning to obtain early warning of risk of collision and 

radar plotting or equivalent systematic observation of detected objects. 

(c) Assumptions shall not be made on the basis of scanty information, 

especially scanty radar information. 

(d) In determining if risk of collision exists the following considerations shall 

be among those taken into account: 

(i) such risk shall be deemed to exist if the compass bearing of an 

approaching vessel does not appreciably change; 

(ii) such risk may sometimes exist even when an appreciable bearing change 

is evident, particularly when approaching a very large vessel or a tow or 

when approaching a vessel at close range. 
15

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 7 

Risk of collision 

§ 83.07 

(a) Every vessel shall use all available means appropriate to the prevailing 

circumstances and conditions to determine if risk of collision exists. If there is 

any doubt such risk shall be deemed to exist. 

(b) Proper use shall be made of radar equipment if fitted and operational, 

including long-range scanning to obtain early warning of risk of collision and 

radar plotting or equivalent systematic observation of detected objects. 

(c) Assumptions shall not be made on the basis of scanty information, 

especially scanty radar information. 

(d) In determining if risk of collision exists the following considerations shall 

be among those taken into account: 

(i) Such risk shall be deemed to exist if the compass bearing of an 

approaching vessel does not appreciably change. 

(ii) Such risk may sometimes exist even when an appreciable bearing change 

is evident, particularly when approaching a very large vessel or a tow or 

when approaching a vessel at close range. 
16

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 8 

Action to Avoid Collision 

(a) Any action taken to avoid collision shall be taken in accordance with the 

Rules of this Part and shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, be positive, 

made in ample time and with due regard to the observance of good seamanship. 

(b) Any alteration of course and/or speed to avoid collision shall, if the 

circumstances of the case admit, be large enough to be readily apparent to another 

vessel observing visually or by radar; a succession of small alterations of course 

and/or speed should be avoided. 

(c) If there is sufficient sea room, alteration of course alone may be the most 

effective action to avoid a close-quarters situation provided that it is made in good 

time, is substantial and does not result in another close-quarters situation. 

(d) Action taken to avoid collision with another vessel shall be such as to result 

in passing at a safe distance. The effectiveness of the action shall be carefully 

checked until the other vessel is finally past and clear. 

(e) If necessary to avoid collision or allow more time to assess the situation, a 

vessel shall slacken her speed or take all way off by stopping or reversing her 

means of propulsion. 

(f) (i) A vessel which, by any of these rules, is required not to impede the 

passage or safe passage of another vessel shall, when required by the 

circumstances of the case, take early action to allow sufficient sea room for 

the safe passage of the other vessel. 

(ii) A vessel required not to impede the passage or safe passage of another 

vessel is not relieved of this obligation if approaching the other vessel so as 

to involve risk of collision and shall, when taking action, have full regard to 

the action which may be required by the rules of this part. 

(iii) A vessel, the passage of which is not to be impeded remains fully 

obliged to comply with the rules of this part when the two vessels are 

approaching one another so as to involve risk of collision. 
17

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 8 

Action to avoid collision 

§ 83.08 

(a) Any action taken to avoid collision shall be taken in accordance with the 

Rules of this subpart (Rules 4-19) (§§ 83.04 through 83.19) and shall, if the 

circumstances of the case admit, be positive, made in ample time and with due 

regard to the observance of good seamanship. 

(b) Any alteration of course and/or speed to avoid collision shall, if the 

circumstances of the case admit, be large enough to be readily apparent to another 

vessel observing visually or by radar; a succession of small alterations of course 

and/or speed should be avoided. 

(c) If there is sufficient sea room, alteration of course alone may be the most 

effective action to avoid a close-quarters situation provided that it is made in good 

time, is substantial and does not result in another close-quarters situation. 

(d) Action taken to avoid collision with another vessel shall be such as to result 

in passing at a safe distance. The effectiveness of the action shall be carefully 

checked until the other vessel is finally past and clear. 

(e) If necessary to avoid collision or allow more time to assess the situation, a 

vessel shall slacken her speed or take all way off by stopping or reversing her 

means of propulsion. 

(f) (i) A vessel which, by any of these Rules, is required not to impede the 

passage or safe passage of another vessel shall, when required by the 

circumstances of the case, take early action to allow sufficient sea room for 

the safe passage of the other vessel. 

(ii) A vessel required not to impede the passage or safe passage of another 

vessel is not relieved of this obligation if approaching the other vessel so as 

to involve risk of collision and shall, when taking action, have full regard to 

the action which may be required by the rules of Subpart B (Rules 4-19). 

(iii) A vessel the passage of which is not to be impeded remains fully obliged 

to comply with the Rules of Subpart B (Rules 4-19) when the two vessels 

are approaching one another so as to involve risk of collision. 
18

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 9 

Narrow Channels 

(a) A vessel proceeding along the course of a narrow channel or fairway shall 

keep as near to the outer limit of the channel or fairway which lies on her 

starboard side as is safe and practicable. 

(b) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede 

the passage of a vessel which can safely navigate only within a narrow channel or 

fairway. 

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any other vessel 

navigating within a narrow channel or fairway. 

(d) A vessel shall not cross a narrow channel or fairway if such crossing 

impedes the passage of a vessel which can safely navigate only within such 

channel or fairway. The latter vessel may use the sound signal prescribed in Rule 

34(d) if in doubt as to the intention of the crossing vessel. 

(e) (i) In a narrow channel or fairway when overtaking can take place only if 

the vessel to be overtaken has to take action to permit safe passing, the 

vessel intending to overtake shall indicate her intention by sounding the 

appropriate signal prescribed in Rule 34(c)(i). The vessel to be overtaken 

shall, if in agreement, sound the appropriate signal prescribed in Rule 

34(c)(ii) and take steps to permit safe passing. If in doubt she may sound 

the signals prescribed in Rule 34(d). 

(ii) This Rule does not relieve the overtaking vessel of her obligation under 

Rule 13. 

(f) A vessel nearing a bend or an area of a narrow channel or fairway where 

other vessels may be obscured by an intervening obstruction shall navigate with 

particular alertness and caution and shall sound the appropriate signal prescribed 

in Rule 34(e). 

(g) Any vessel shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid anchoring in 

a narrow channel. 
19

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 9 

Narrow channels 

§ 83.09 

(a) (i) A vessel proceeding along the course of a narrow channel or fairway 

shall keep as near to the outer limit of the channel or fairway which lies on 

her starboard side as is safe and practicable. 

(ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(i) of this Rule and Rule 14(a) (§ 83.14(a)), 

a power-driven vessel operating in narrow channels or fairways on the Great 

Lakes, Western Rivers, or waters specified by the Secretary ‡, and proceeding 

downbound with a following current shall have the right-of-way over an 

upbound vessel, shall propose the manner and place of passage, and shall 

initiate the maneuvering signals prescribed by Rule 34(a)(i) (§ 83.34(a)(i)), as 

appropriate. The vessel proceeding upbound against the current shall hold 

as necessary to permit safe passing. 

(b) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede 

the passage of a vessel that can safely navigate only within a narrow channel or 

fairway. 

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any other vessel 

navigating within a narrow channel or fairway. 

(d) A vessel shall not cross a narrow channel or fairway if such crossing 

impedes the passage of a vessel which can safely navigate only within that channel 

or fairway. The latter vessel must use the signal prescribed in Rule 34(d) (§ 

83.34(d)) if in doubt as to the intention of the crossing vessel. 

(e) (i) In a narrow channel or fairway when overtaking, the power-driven vessel 

intending to overtake another power-driven vessel shall indicate her 

intention by sounding the appropriate signal prescribed in Rule 34(c) (§ 

83.34)(c)) and take steps to permit safe passing. The power-driven vessel 

being overtaken, if in agreement, shall sound the same signal and may, if 

specifically agreed to, take steps to permit safe passing. If in doubt she shall 

sound the signal prescribed in Rule 34(d) (§ 83.34)(d)). 

(ii) This Rule does not relieve the overtaking vessel of her obligation under 

Rule 13 (§ 83.13). 

(f) A vessel nearing a bend or an area of a narrow channel or fairway where 

other vessels may be obscured by an intervening obstruction shall navigate with 

particular alertness and caution and shall sound the appropriate signal prescribed 

in Rule 34(e) (§ 83.34(e)). 

(g) Any vessel shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid anchoring in 

a narrow channel. 

 

‡ See 33 CFR 89.25, provided for reference on page 145 of this handbook.
20

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 10 

Traffic Separation Schemes 

(a) This Rule applies to traffic separation schemes adopted by the Organization 

and does not relieve any vessel of her obligation under any other rule. 

(b) A vessel using a traffic separation scheme shall: 

(i) proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general direction of traffic flow 

for that lane; 

(ii) so far as practicable keep clear of a traffic separation line or separation zone; 

(iii) normally join or leave a traffic lane at the termination of the lane, but when 

joining or leaving from either side shall do so at as small an angle to the general 

direction of traffic flow as practicable. 

(c) A vessel shall, so far as practicable, avoid crossing traffic lanes but if obliged to 

do so shall cross on a heading as nearly as practicable at right angles to the general 

direction of traffic flow. 

(d) (i) A vessel shall not use an inshore traffic zone when she can safely use 

the appropriate traffic lane within the adjacent traffic separation scheme. 

However, vessels of less than 20 meters in length, sailing vessels and vessels 

engaged in fishing may use the inshore traffic zone. 

(ii) Notwithstanding subparagraph (d)(i), a vessel may use an inshore traffic 

zone when en route to or from a port, offshore installation or structure, 

pilot station or any other place situated within the inshore traffic zone, or 

to avoid immediate danger. 

(e) A vessel other than a crossing vessel or a vessel joining or leaving a lane 

shall not normally enter a separation zone or cross a separation line except: 

(i) in cases of emergency to avoid immediate danger; 

(ii) to engage in fishing within a separation zone. 

(f) A vessel navigating in areas near the terminations of traffic separation 

schemes shall do so with particular caution. 

(g) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid anchoring in a traffic separation 

scheme or in areas near its terminations. 

(h) A vessel not using a traffic separation scheme shall avoid it by as wide a 

margin as is practicable. 

(i) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any vessel 

following a traffic lane. 

(j) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede 

the safe passage of a power-driven vessel following a traffic lane. 
21

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 10 

Traffic separation schemes 

§ 83.10

(a) This Rule applies to traffic separation schemes and does not relieve any vessel 

of her obligation under any other Rule in subchapter E ‡. 

(b) A vessel using a traffic separation scheme shall: 

(i) Proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general direction of traffic flow 

for that lane; 

(ii) So far as practicable keep clear of a traffic separation line or separation zone; 

(iii) Normally join or leave a traffic lane at the termination of the lane, but when 

joining or leaving from either side shall do so at as small an angle to the general 

direction of traffic flow as practicable. 

(c) A vessel shall, so far as practicable, avoid crossing traffic lanes but if obliged to 

do so shall cross on a heading as nearly as practicable at right angles to the general 

direction of traffic flow. 

(d) (i) A vessel shall not use an inshore traffic zone when she can safely use 

the appropriate traffic lane within the adjacent traffic separation scheme. 

However, vessels of less than 20 meters in length, sailing vessels, and vessels 

engaged in fishing may use the inshore traffic zone. 

(ii) Notwithstanding subparagraph (d)(i) of this Rule, a vessel may use an 

inshore traffic zone when en route to or from a port, offshore installation 

or structure, pilot station, or any other place situated within the inshore 

traffic zone, or to avoid immediate danger. 

(e) A vessel other than a crossing vessel or a vessel joining or leaving a lane 

shall not normally enter a separation zone or cross a separation line except: 

(i) In cases of emergency to avoid immediate danger; 

(ii) To engage in fishing within a separation zone. 

(f) A vessel navigating in areas near the terminations of traffic separation 

schemes shall do so with particular caution. 

(g) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid anchoring in a traffic separation 

scheme or in areas near its terminations. 

(h) A vessel not using a traffic separation scheme shall avoid it by as wide a 

margin as is practicable. 

(i) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any vessel 

following a traffic lane. 

(j) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede 

the safe passage of a power-driven vessel following a traffic lane. 

 

‡ Parts 83-90 of Title 33 Code of Federal Regulations.
22

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 10—CONTINUED 

(k) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when engaged in an operation 

for the maintenance of safety of navigation in a traffic separation scheme is 

exempted from complying with this Rule to the extent necessary to carry out the 

operation. 

(l) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when engaged in an operation 

for the laying, servicing or picking up of a submarine cable, within a traffic 

separation scheme, is exempted from complying with this Rule to the extent 

necessary to carry out the operation. 

Section II—Conduct of Vessels in Sight of 

One Another 

Rule 11 

Application 

Rules in this section apply to vessels in sight of one another. 

Rule 12 

Sailing Vessels 

(a) When two sailing vessels are approaching one another, so as to involve risk 

of collision, one of them shall keep out of the way of the other as follows: 

(i) when each has the wind on a different side, the vessel which has the 

wind on the port side shall keep out of the way of the other; 

(ii) when both have the wind on the same side, the vessel which is to 

windward shall keep out of the way of the vessel which is to leeward; 

(iii) if a vessel with the wind on the port side sees a vessel to windward and 

cannot determine with certainty whether the other vessel has the wind on 

the port or on the starboard side, she shall keep out of the way of the other. 

(b) For the purposes of this Rule the windward side shall be deemed to be the 

side opposite to that on which the mainsail is carried or, in the case of a squarerigged vessel, the side opposite to that on which the largest fore-and-aft sail is 

carried. 
23

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 10—CONTINUED 

(k) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when engaged in an operation 

for the maintenance of safety of navigation in a traffic separation scheme is 

exempted from complying with this Rule to the extent necessary to carry out the 

operation. 

(l) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when engaged in an operation 

for the laying, servicing, or picking up of a submarine cable, within a traffic 

separation scheme, is exempted from complying with this Rule to the extent 

necessary to carry out the operation. 

Conduct of Vessels in Sight of 

One Another 

Rule 11 

Application 

§ 83.11

Rules 11 through 18 (§§ 83.11 through 83.18) apply to vessels in sight of one 

another. 

Rule 12 

Sailing vessels 

§ 83.12

(a) When two sailing vessels are approaching one another, so as to involve risk 

of collision, one of them shall keep out of the way of the other as follows: 

(i) When each has the wind on a different side, the vessel which has the 

wind on the port side shall keep out of the way of the other. 

(ii) When both have the wind on the same side, the vessel which is to 

windward shall keep out of the way of the vessel which is to leeward. 

(iii) If a vessel with the wind on the port side sees a vessel to windward and 

cannot determine with certainty whether the other vessel has the wind on 

the port or on the starboard side, she shall keep out of the way of the other. 

(b) For the purpose of this Rule, the windward side shall be deemed to be the 

side opposite to that on which the mainsail is carried or, in the case of a squarerigged vessel, the side opposite to that on which the largest fore-and-aft sail is 

carried. 
24

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 13 

Overtaking 

(a) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Rules of Part B, Sections I and 

II, any vessel overtaking any other shall keep out of the way of the vessel being 

overtaken. 

(b) A vessel shall be deemed to be overtaking when coming up with another 

vessel from a direction more than 22.5° abaft her beam, that is, in such a position 

with reference to the vessel she is overtaking, that at night she would be able to 

see only the sternlight of that vessel but neither of her sidelights. 

(c) When a vessel is in any doubt as to whether she is overtaking another, she 

shall assume that this is the case and act accordingly. 

(d) Any subsequent alteration of the bearing between the two vessels shall not 

make the overtaking vessel a crossing vessel within the meaning of these Rules 

or relieve her of the duty of keeping clear of the overtaken vessel until she is 

finally past and clear. 

Rule 14 

Head-on Situation 

(a) When two power-driven vessels are meeting on reciprocal or nearly 

reciprocal courses so as to involve risk of collision each shall alter her course to 

starboard so that each shall pass on the port side of the other. 

(b) Such a situation shall be deemed to exist when a vessel sees the other ahead 

or nearly ahead and by night she could see the masthead lights of the other in a 

line or nearly in a line and/or both sidelights and by day she observes the 

corresponding aspect of the other vessel. 

(c) When a vessel is in any doubt as to whether such a situation exists she shall 

assume that it does exist and act accordingly. 
25

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 13 

Overtaking 

§ 83.13

(a) Notwithstanding anything contained in Rules 4 through 18 (§§ 83.04 

through 83.18), any vessel overtaking any other shall keep out of the way of the 

vessel being overtaken. 

(b) A vessel shall be deemed to be overtaking when coming up with another 

vessel from a direction more than 22.5 degrees abaft her beam; that is, in such a 

position with reference to the vessel she is overtaking, that at night she would be 

able to see only the sternlight of that vessel but neither of her sidelights. 

(c) When a vessel is in any doubt as to whether she is overtaking another, she 

shall assume that this is the case and act accordingly. 

(d) Any subsequent alteration of the bearing between the two vessels shall not 

make the overtaking vessel a crossing vessel within the meaning of these Rules 

or relieve her of the duty of keeping clear of the overtaken vessel until she is 

finally past and clear. 

Rule 14 

Head-on situation 

§ 83.14

(a) Unless otherwise agreed, when two power-driven vessels are meeting on 

reciprocal or nearly reciprocal courses so as to involve risk of collision each shall 

alter her course to starboard so that each shall pass on the port side of the other. 

(b) Such a situation shall be deemed to exist when a vessel sees the other ahead 

or nearly ahead and by night she could see the masthead lights of the other in a 

line or nearly in a line and/or both sidelights and by day she observes the 

corresponding aspect of the other vessel. 

(c) When a vessel is in any doubt as to whether such a situation exists she shall 

assume that it does exist and act accordingly. 

(d) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this Rule, a power-driven vessel 

operating on the Great Lakes, Western Rivers, or waters specified by the 

Secretary ‡, and proceeding downbound with a following current shall have the 

right-of-way over an upbound vessel, shall propose the manner of passage, and 

shall initiate the maneuvering signals prescribed by Rule 34(a)(i) (§ 83.34(a)(i)), as 

appropriate. 

 

‡ See 33 CFR 89.25, provided for reference on page 145 of this handbook.
26

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 15 

Crossing Situation 

When two power-driven vessels are crossing so as to involve risk of collision, 

the vessel which has the other on her own starboard side shall keep out of the 

way and shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid crossing ahead of the 

other vessel. 

Rule 16 

Action by Give-way Vessel 

Every vessel which is directed to keep out of the way of another vessel shall, 

so far as possible, take early and substantial action to keep well clear. 

Rule 17 

Action by Stand-on Vessel 

(a) (i) Where one of two vessels is to keep out of the way the other shall keep 

her course and speed. 

(ii) The latter vessel may, however, take action to avoid collision by her 

maneuver alone, as soon as it becomes apparent to her that the vessel 

required to keep out of the way is not taking appropriate action in 

compliance with these Rules. 

(b) When, from any cause, the vessel required to keep her course and speed 

finds herself so close that collision cannot be avoided by the action of the giveway vessel alone, she shall take such action as will best aid to avoid collision. 

(c) A power-driven vessel which takes action in a crossing situation in 

accordance with subparagraph (a)(ii) of this Rule to avoid collision with another 

power-driven vessel shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, not alter course 

to port for a vessel on her own port side. 

(d) This Rule does not relieve the give-way vessel of her obligation to keep out 

of the way. 
27

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 15 

Crossing situation 

§ 83.15

(a) When two power-driven vessels are crossing so as to involve risk of 

collision, the vessel which has the other on her starboard side shall keep out of 

the way and shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid crossing ahead of 

the other vessel. 

(b) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this Rule, on the Great Lakes, Western 

Rivers, or water specified by the Secretary ‡, a power-driven vessel crossing a river 

shall keep out of the way of a power-driven vessel ascending or descending the 

river. 

Rule 16 

Action by give-way vessel 

§ 83.16

Every vessel which is directed to keep out of the way of another vessel shall, 

so far as possible, take early and substantial action to keep well clear. 

Rule 17 

Action by stand-on vessel 

§ 83.17

(a) (i) Where one of two vessels is to keep out of the way, the other shall keep 

her course and speed. 

(ii) The latter vessel may, however, take action to avoid collision by her 

maneuver alone, as soon as it becomes apparent to her that the vessel 

required to keep out of the way is not taking appropriate action in 

compliance with these Rules. 

(b) When, from any cause, the vessel required to keep her course and speed 

finds herself so close that collision cannot be avoided by the action of the giveway vessel alone, she shall take such action as will best aid to avoid collision. 

(c) A power-driven vessel which takes action in a crossing situation in 

accordance with paragraph (a)(ii) of this Rule to avoid collision with another 

power-driven vessel shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, not alter course 

to port for a vessel on her own port side. 

(d) This Rule does not relieve the give-way vessel of her obligation to keep out 

of the way. 

 

‡ See 33 CFR 89.25, provided for reference on page 145 of this handbook.
28

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 18 

Responsibilities Between Vessels 

Except where Rules 9, 10 and 13 otherwise require: 

(a) A power-driven vessel underway shall keep out of the way of: 

(i) a vessel not under command; 

(ii) a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver; 

(iii) a vessel engaged in fishing; 

(iv) a sailing vessel. 

(b) A sailing vessel underway shall keep out of the way of: 

(i) a vessel not under command; 

(ii) a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver; 

(iii) a vessel engaged in fishing. 

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing when underway shall, so far as possible, keep 

out of the way of: 

(i) a vessel not under command; 

(ii) a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver. 

(d) (i) Any vessel other than a vessel not under command or a vessel restricted 

in her ability to maneuver shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, 

avoid impeding the safe passage of a vessel constrained by her draft, 

exhibiting the signals in Rule 28. 

(ii) A vessel constrained by her draft shall navigate with particular caution 

having full regard to her special condition. 

(e) A seaplane on the water shall, in general, keep well clear of all vessels and 

avoid impeding their navigation. In circumstances, however, where risk of 

collision exists, she shall comply with the Rules of this Part. 

(f) (i) A WIG craft shall, when taking off, landing and in flight near the surface, 

keep well clear of all other vessels and avoid impeding their navigation; 

(ii) A WIG craft operating on the water surface shall comply with the 

Rules of this Part as a power-driven vessel. 
29

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Rule 18 

Responsibilities between vessels 

§ 83.18

Except where Rules 9, 10, and 13 (§§ 83.09, 83.10, and 83.13) otherwise require: 

(a) A power-driven vessel underway shall keep out of the way of: 

(i) A vessel not under command; 

(ii) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver; 

(iii) A vessel engaged in fishing; 

(iv) A sailing vessel. 

(b) A sailing vessel underway shall keep out of the way of: 

(i) A vessel not under command; 

(ii) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver; and 

(iii) A vessel engaged in fishing. 

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing when underway shall, so far as possible, keep 

out of the way of: 

(i) A vessel not under command; and 

(ii) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver. 

(d) [Reserved] 

(e) A seaplane on the water shall, in general, keep well clear of all vessels and 

avoid impeding their navigation. In circumstances, however, where risk of 

collision exists, she shall comply with the Rules of this Subpart (Rules 4-19) (§§ 

83.04 through 83.19); and 

(f) (i) a WIG craft shall, when taking off, landing and in flight near the surface, 

keep well clear of all other vessels and avoid impeding their navigation; and 

(ii) a WIG craft operating on the water shall comply with the Rules of this 

Subpart (Rules 4-19) (§§ 83.04 through 83.19) as a power-driven vessel. 
30

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Section III—Conduct of Vessels in Restricted 

Visibility 

Rule 19 

Conduct of Vessels in Restricted Visibility 

(a) This Rule applies to vessels not in sight of one another when navigating in 

or near an area of restricted visibility. 

(b) Every vessel shall proceed at a safe speed adapted to the prevailing 

circumstances and conditions of restricted visibility. A power-driven vessel shall 

have her engines ready for immediate maneuver. 

(c) Every vessel shall have due regard to the prevailing circumstances and 

conditions of restricted visibility when complying with the Rules of Section I of 

this part. 

(d) A vessel which detects by radar alone the presence of another vessel shall 

determine if a close-quarters situation is developing and/or risk of collision exists. 

If so, she shall take avoiding action in ample time, provided that when such action 

consists of an alteration of course, so far as possible the following shall be 

avoided: 

(i) an alteration of course to port for a vessel forward of the beam, other 

than for a vessel being overtaken; 

(ii) an alteration of course towards a vessel abeam or abaft the beam. 

(e) Except where it has been determined that a risk of collision does not exist, 

every vessel which hears apparently forward of her beam the fog signal of another 

vessel, or which cannot avoid a close-quarters situation with another vessel 

forward of her beam, shall reduce her speed to the minimum at which she can be 

kept on course. She shall if necessary take all her way off and in any event navigate 

with extreme caution until danger of collision is over. 
31

—INLAND— 

Steering and Sailing Rules 

Conduct of Vessels in Restricted Visibility 

Rule 19 

Conduct of vessels in restricted visibility 

§ 83.19

(a) This Rule applies to vessels not in sight of one another when navigating in 

or near an area of restricted visibility. 

(b) Every vessel shall proceed at a safe speed adapted to the prevailing 

circumstances and conditions of restricted visibility. A power-driven vessel shall 

have her engines ready for immediate maneuver. 

(c) Every vessel shall have due regard to the prevailing circumstances and 

conditions of restricted visibility when complying with Rules 4 through 10 (§§ 

83.04 through 83.10). 

(d) A vessel which detects by radar alone the presence of another vessel shall 

determine if a close-quarters situation is developing and/or risk of collision exists. 

If so, she shall take avoiding action in ample time, provided that when such action 

consists of an alteration of course, so far as possible the following shall be 

avoided: 

(i) An alteration of course to port for a vessel forward of the beam, other 

than for a vessel being overtaken; 

(ii) An alteration of course toward a vessel abeam or abaft the beam. 

(e) Except where it has been determined that a risk of collision does not exist, 

every vessel which hears apparently forward of her beam the fog signal of another 

vessel, or which cannot avoid a close-quarters situation with another vessel 

forward of her beam, shall reduce her speed to the minimum at which she can be 

kept on course. She shall if necessary take all her way off and, in any event, 

navigate with extreme caution until danger of collision is over. 
32

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

PART C—LIGHTS AND SHAPES 

Rule 20 

Application 

(a) Rules in this part shall be complied with in all weathers. 

(b) The Rules concerning lights shall be complied with from sunset to sunrise, 

and during such times no other lights shall be exhibited, except such lights as 

cannot be mistaken for the lights specified in these Rules or do not impair their 

visibility or distinctive character, or interfere with the keeping of a proper lookout. 

(c) The lights prescribed by these Rules shall, if carried, also be exhibited from 

sunrise to sunset in restricted visibility and may be exhibited in all other 

circumstances when it is deemed necessary. 

(d) The Rules concerning shapes shall be complied with by day. 

(e) The lights and shapes specified in these Rules shall comply with the 

provisions of Annex I to these Regulations. 
33

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

SUBPART C—LIGHTS AND SHAPES 

Rule 20 

Application 

§ 83.20

(a) Rules in this subpart (Rules 20-31) (§§ 83.20 through 83.31) shall be 

complied with in all weathers. 

(b) The Rules concerning lights (§§ 83.20 through 83.31) shall be complied with 

from sunset to sunrise, and during such times no other lights shall be exhibited, 

except such lights as cannot be mistaken for the lights specified in these Rules or 

do not impair their visibility or distinctive character, or interfere with the keeping 

of a proper look-out. 

(c) The lights prescribed by these Rules shall, if carried, also be exhibited from 

sunrise to sunset in restricted visibility and may be exhibited in all other 

circumstances when it is deemed necessary. 

(d) The Rules concerning shapes shall be complied with by day.

(e) The lights and shapes specified in these Rules shall comply with the 

provisions of Annex I of these Rules (33 CFR Part 84). 

(f) A vessel’s navigation lights and shapes may be lowered if necessary to pass 

under a bridge. 
34

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 21 

Definitions 

(a) Masthead light means a white light placed over the fore and aft centerline of 

the vessel showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 225° and so 

fixed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5° abaft the beam on either side 

of the vessel. 

(b) Sidelights means a green light on the starboard side and a red light on the 

port side each showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 112.5° 

and so fixed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5° abaft the beam on its 

respective side. In a vessel of less than 20 m in length the sidelights may be 

combined in one lantern carried on the fore and aft centerline of the vessel. 

(c) Sternlight means a white light placed as nearly as practicable at the stern 

showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 135° and so fixed as to 

show the light 67.5° from right aft on each side of the vessel. 

(d) Towing light means a yellow light having the same characteristics as the 

sternlight defined in paragraph (c) of this Rule. 

(e) All-round light means a light showing an unbroken light over an arc of the 

horizon of 360°. 

(f) Flashing light means a light flashing at regular intervals at a frequency of 120 

flashes or more per minute. 
35

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 21 

Definitions 

§ 83.21

(a) Masthead light means a white light placed over the fore and aft centerline of 

the vessel showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 225 degrees 

and so fixed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5 degrees abaft the beam 

on either side of the vessel, except that on a vessel of less than 12 meters in length 

the masthead light shall be placed as nearly as practicable to the fore and aft 

centerline of the vessel. 

(b) Sidelights mean a green light on the starboard side and a red light on the port 

side each showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 112.5 degrees 

and so fixed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5 degrees abaft the beam 

on its respective side. On a vessel of less than 20 meters in length the sidelights 

may be combined in one lantern carried on the fore and aft centerline of the 

vessel, except that on a vessel of less than 12 meters in length the sidelights when 

combined in one lantern shall be placed as nearly as practicable to the fore and 

aft centerline of the vessel. 

(c) Sternlight means a white light placed as nearly as practicable at the stern 

showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 135 degrees and so fixed 

as to show the light 67.5 degrees from right aft on each side of the vessel. 

(d) Towing light means a yellow light having the same characteristics as the 

“sternlight” defined in paragraph (c) of this Rule. 

(e) All-round light means a light showing an unbroken light over an arc of the 

horizon of 360 degrees. 

(f) Flashing light means a light flashing at regular intervals at a frequency of 120 

flashes or more per minute. 

(g) Special flashing light means a yellow light flashing at regular intervals at a 

frequency of 50 to 70 flashes per minute, placed as far forward and as nearly as 

practicable on the fore and aft centerline of the tow and showing an unbroken 

light over an arc of the horizon of not less than 180 degrees nor more than 225 

degrees and so fixed as to show the light from right ahead to abeam and no more 

than 22.5 degrees abaft the beam on either side of the vessel. 
36

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 22 

Visibility of Lights 

The lights prescribed in these Rules shall have an intensity as specified in 

Section 8 of Annex I to these Regulations so as to be visible at the following 

minimum ranges: 

(a) In vessels of 50 meters or more in length: 

 a masthead light, 6 miles; 

 a sidelight, 3 miles; 

 a sternlight, 3 miles; 

 a towing light, 3 miles; 

 a white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 3 miles. 

(b) In vessels of 12 meters or more in length but less than 50 meters in length: 

 a masthead light, 5 miles; except that where the length of the vessel is 

less than 20 meters, 3 miles; 

 a sidelight, 2 miles; 

 a sternlight, 2 miles; 

 a towing light, 2 miles; 

 a white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 2 miles. 

(c) In vessels of less than 12 meters in length: 

 a masthead light, 2 miles; 

 a sidelight, 1 mile; 

 a sternlight, 2 miles; 

 a towing light, 2 miles; 

 a white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 2 miles. 

(d) In inconspicuous, partly submerged vessels or objects being towed: 

 a white all-round light, 3 miles. 
37

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 22 

Visibility of lights 

§ 83.22

The lights prescribed in these Rules (Subpart C) shall have an intensity as 

specified in Annex I to these Rules (33 CFR part 84), so as to be visible at the 

following minimum ranges: 

(a) In a vessel of 50 meters or more in length: 

(i) A masthead light, 6 miles; 

(ii) A sidelight, 3 miles; 

(iii) A sternlight, 3 miles; 

(iv) A towing light, 3 miles; 

(v) A white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 3 miles; and 

(vi) A special flashing light, 2 miles. 

(b) In a vessel of 12 meters or more in length but less than 50 meters in length: 

(i) A masthead light, 5 miles; except that where the length of the vessel is 

less than 20 meters, 3 miles; 

(ii) A sidelight, 2 miles; 

(iii) A sternlight, 2 miles; 

(iv) A towing light, 2 miles; 

(v) A white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 2 miles; and 

(vi) A special flashing light, 2 miles. 

(c) In a vessel of less than 12 meters in length: 

(i) A masthead light, 2 miles; 

(ii) A sidelight, 1 mile; 

(iii) A sternlight, 2 miles; 

(iv) A towing light, 2 miles; 

(v) A white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 2 miles; and 

(vi) A special flashing light, 2 miles. 

(d) In an inconspicuous, partly submerged vessel or object being towed: 

(i) A white all-round light, 3 miles. 

(ii) [Reserved] 
38

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23 

Power-driven Vessels Underway 

(a) A power-driven vessel underway shall exhibit: 

(i) a masthead light forward; 

(ii) a second masthead light abaft of and higher than the forward one; except 

that a vessel of less than 50 meters in length shall not be obliged to exhibit 

such light but may do so; 

(iii) sidelights; and 

(iv) a sternlight. 

Power-driven vessel underway—50 meters or greater in length. 

Same for Inland. 
39

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23 

Power-driven vessels underway 

§ 83.23

(a) A power-driven vessel underway shall exhibit: 

(i) A masthead light forward; 

(ii) A second masthead light abaft of and higher than the forward one; 

except that a vessel of less than 50 meters in length shall not be obliged to 

exhibit such light but may do so; 

(iii) Sidelights; and 

(iv) A sternlight. 

Power-driven vessel underway—less than 50 meters in length. 

Same for International. 
40

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23—CONTINUED 

(b) An air-cushion vessel when operating in the non-displacement mode shall, 

in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit an allround flashing yellow light. 

(c) A WIG craft only when taking off, landing and in flight near the surface 

shall, in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit a 

high intensity all-round flashing red light. 

Air-cushion vessel when operating in the non-displacement mode—vessel less 

than 50 meters in length. Same for Inland. 
41

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23—CONTINUED 

(b) An air-cushion vessel when operating in the non-displacement mode shall, 

in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit an allround flashing yellow light where it can best be seen. 

(c) A WIG craft only when taking off, landing and in flight near the surface 

shall, in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit a 

high intensity all-round flashing red light. 

Air-cushion vessel when operating in the displacement mode— 

vessel less than 50 meters in length. Same for International. 
42

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23—CONTINUED 

(d) (i) A power-driven vessel of less than 12 meters in length may in lieu of 

the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule exhibit an all-round white 

light and sidelights; 

(ii) a power-driven vessel of less than 7 meters in length whose maximum 

speed does not exceed 7 knots may in lieu of the lights prescribed in 

paragraph (a) of this Rule exhibit an all-round white light and shall, if 

practicable, also exhibit sidelights; 

(iii) the masthead light or all-round white light on a power-driven vessel of 

less than 12 meters in length may be displaced from the fore and aft 

centerline of the vessel if centerline fitting is not practicable, provided that 

the sidelights are combined in one lantern which shall be carried on the fore 

and aft centerline of the vessel or located as nearly as practicable in the same 

fore and aft line as the masthead light or the all-round white light. 

Power-driven vessel of less than 7 meters in length whose maximum speed does 

not exceed 7 knots. International only. 
43

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23—CONTINUED 

(d) A power-driven vessel of less than 12 meters in length may, in lieu of the 

lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit an all-round white light and 

sidelights. 

Power-driven vessel of less than 12 meters in length. 

Same for International. 
44

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

[BLANK] 
45

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 23—CONTINUED 

(e) A power-driven vessel when operating on the Great Lakes may carry an allround white light in lieu of the second masthead light and sternlight prescribed 

in paragraph (a) of this Rule. The light shall be carried in the position of the 

second masthead light and be visible at the same minimum range. 

Power-driven vessel on Great Lakes.
46

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24 

Towing and Pushing 

(a) A power-driven vessel when towing shall exhibit: 

(i) instead of the light prescribed in Rule 23(a)(i) or (a)(ii), two masthead 

lights in a vertical line. When the length of the tow, measuring from the 

stern of the towing vessel to the after end of the tow, exceeds 200 meters, 

three such lights in a vertical line; 

(ii) sidelights; 

(iii) a sternlight; 

(iv) a towing light in a vertical line above the sternlight; and 

(v) when the length of the tow exceeds 200 meters, a diamond shape where 

it can best be seen. 

Power-driven vessel towing astern—towing vessel less than 50 meters in length; 

length of tow exceeds 200 meters. 

Same for Inland
47

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24 

Towing and pushing 

§ 83.24

(a) A power-driven vessel when towing astern shall exhibit: 

(i) Instead of the light prescribed either in Rule 23(a)(i) or 23(a)(ii) (§§ 

83.23(a)(i) and (ii)), two masthead lights in a vertical line. When the length 

of the tow, measuring from the stern of the towing vessel to the after end 

of the tow exceeds 200 meters, three such lights in a vertical line; 

(ii) Sidelights; 

(iii) A sternlight; 

(iv) A towing light in a vertical line above the sternlight; and 

(v) When the length of the tow exceeds 200 meters, a diamond shape where 

it can best be seen. 

Power-driven vessel towing astern—towing vessel less than 50 meters in length; 

length of tow 200 meters or less. 

Same for International.
48

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(b) When a pushing vessel and a vessel being pushed ahead are rigidly 

connected in a composite unit they shall be regarded as a power-driven vessel 

and exhibit the lights prescribed in Rule 23. 

Composite unit underway. 

Same for Inland.
49

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(b) When a pushing vessel and a vessel being pushed ahead are rigidly 

connected in a composite unit they shall be regarded as a power-driven vessel 

and exhibit the lights prescribed in Rule 23 (§ 83.23). 

Composite unit underway—less than 50 meters in length.

Same for International.
50

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(c) A power-driven vessel when pushing ahead or towing alongside, except in 

the case of a composite unit, shall exhibit: 

(i) instead of the light prescribed in Rule 23(a)(i) or 23(a)(ii), two masthead 

lights in a vertical line; 

(ii) sidelights; and 

(iii) a sternlight. 

Power-driven vessel pushing ahead or towing alongside— 

towing vessel less than 50 meters in length. 

International only. 

(d) A power-driven vessel to which paragraph (a) or (c) of this Rule applies shall 

also comply with Rule 23(a)(ii). 

Power-driven vessel towing astern—length of tow 200 meters or less. 

The after masthead light is optional for vessel less than 50 meters in 

length. Same for Inland. 
51

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(c) A power-driven vessel when pushing ahead or towing alongside, except as 

required by paragraphs (b) and (i) of this Rule, shall exhibit: 

(i) Instead of the light prescribed either in Rule 23(a)(i) or 23(a)(ii) (§ 

83.23)(a)(i) and (ii), two masthead lights in a vertical line; 

(ii) Sidelights; and 

(iii) Two towing lights in a vertical line. 

Power-driven vessel pushing ahead or towing alongside—towing vessel 

less than 50 meters in length. 

Inland only. 

(d) A power-driven vessel to which paragraphs (a) or (c) of this Rule applies 

shall also comply with Rule 23(a)(i) and 23(a)(ii) (§ 83.23(a)(i) or (ii)). 

Power-driven vessel towing astern—length of tow 200 meters or less. 

When masthead lights for towing or pushing are exhibited aft, a 

forward masthead light is required. Same for International. 
52

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(e) A vessel or object being towed, other than those mentioned in paragraph 

(g) of this Rule, shall exhibit: 

(i) sidelights; 

(ii) a sternlight; 

(iii) when the length of the tow exceeds 200 meters, a diamond shape where 

it can best be seen. 

Vessel or object being towed—length of tow exceeds 200 meters. 

Same for Inland. 
53

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(e) A vessel or object other than those referred to in paragraph (g) of this Rule 

being towed shall exhibit: 

(i) Sidelights; 

(ii) A sternlight; and 

(iii) When the length of the tow exceeds 200 meters, a diamond shape where 

it can best be seen. 

Vessel being towed—length of tow 200 meters or less. 

Same for International. 
54

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(f) Provided that any number of vessels being towed alongside or pushed in a 

group shall be lighted as one vessel: 

(i) a vessel being pushed ahead, not being part of a composite unit, shall 

exhibit at the forward end, sidelights; 

(ii) a vessel being towed alongside shall exhibit a sternlight and at the 

forward end, sidelights. 

Vessel being pushed ahead, not being part of a composite unit. 

International only. 

Vessel being towed alongside. 

International only. 
55

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(f) Provided that any number of vessels being towed alongside or pushed in a 

group shall be lighted as one vessel, except as provided in paragraph (f)(iii) of this 

Rule. 

(i) A vessel being pushed ahead, not being part of a composite unit, shall 

exhibit at the forward end, sidelights and a special flashing light. 

(ii) A vessel being towed alongside shall exhibit a sternlight and at the 

forward end, sidelights and a special flashing light. 

(iii) When vessels are towed alongside on both sides of the towing vessel, a 

sternlight shall be exhibited on the stern of the outboard vessel on each side 

of the towing vessel, and a single set of sidelights as far forward and as far 

outboard as is practicable, and a single special flashing light. 

Vessel being pushed ahead, not being part of a composite unit. 

Inland only. 

Vessel being towed alongside. 

Inland only. 
56

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(g) An inconspicuous, partly submerged vessel or object, or combination of 

such vessels or objects being towed, shall exhibit: 

(i) if it is less than 25 meters in breadth, one all-round white light at or near 

the forward end and one at or near the after end except that dracones need 

not exhibit a light at or near the forward end; 

(ii) if it is 25 meters or more in breadth, two additional all-round white lights 

at or near the extremities of its breadth; 

(iii) if it exceeds 100 meters in length, additional all-round white lights 

between the lights prescribed in subparagraphs (i) and (ii) so that the 

distance between the lights shall not exceed 100 meters; 

(iv) a diamond shape at or near the aftermost extremity of the last vessel or 

object being towed and if the length of the tow exceeds 200 meters an 

additional diamond shape where it can best be seen and located as far 

forward as is practicable. 

(h) Where from any sufficient cause it is impracticable for a vessel or object 

being towed to exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in paragraph (e) or (g) of 

this Rule, all possible measures shall be taken to light the vessel or object towed 

or at least to indicate the presence of such vessel or object. 

(i) Where from any sufficient cause it is impracticable for a vessel not normally 

engaged in towing operations to display the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or 

(c) of this Rule, such vessel shall not be required to exhibit those lights when 

engaged in towing another vessel in distress or otherwise in need of assistance. 

All possible measures shall be taken to indicate the nature of the relationship 

between the towing vessel and the vessel being towed as authorized by Rule 36, 

in particular by illuminating the towline 
57

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(g) An inconspicuous, partly submerged vessel or object, or combination of 

such vessels or objects being towed, shall exhibit: 

(i) If it is less than 25 meters in breadth, one all-round white light at or near 

each end; 

(ii) If it is 25 meters or more in breadth, four all-round white lights to mark 

its length and breadth; 

(iii) If it exceeds 100 meters in length, additional all-round white lights 

between the lights prescribed in paragraphs (g)(i) and (ii) of this Rule so that 

the distance between the lights shall not exceed 100 meters: provided, that 

any vessels or objects being towed alongside each other shall be lighted as 

one vessel or object; 

(iv) A diamond shape at or near the aftermost extremity of the last vessel 

or object being towed; and 

(v) The towing vessel may direct a searchlight in the direction of the tow to 

indicate its presence to an approaching vessel. 

(h) Where from any sufficient cause it is impracticable for a vessel or object 

being towed to exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph (e) or (g) of this Rule, 

all possible measures shall be taken to light the vessel or object towed or at least 

to indicate the presence of such vessel or object. 

(i) Where from any sufficient cause it is impracticable for a vessel not normally 

engaged in towing operations to display the lights prescribed by paragraph (a), (c) 

or (j) of this Rule, such vessel shall not be required to exhibit those lights when 

engaged in towing another vessel in distress or otherwise in need of assistance. 

All possible measures shall be taken to indicate the nature of the relationship 

between the towing vessel and the vessel being assisted. The searchlight 

authorized by Rule 36 (§ 83.36) may be used to illuminate the tow 
58

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

[BLANK] 
59

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 24—CONTINUED 

(j) Notwithstanding paragraph (c) of this Rule, on the Western Rivers (except 

below the Huey P. Long Bridge at mile 106.1 Above Head of Passes on the 

Mississippi River) and on waters specified by the Secretary ‡, a power-driven 

vessel when pushing ahead or towing alongside, except as paragraph (b) of this 

Rule applies, shall exhibit: 

(i) Sidelights; and 

(ii) Two towing lights in a vertical line

Power-driven vessel pushing ahead on Western River 

(above the Huey P. Long Bridge at mile 106.1 Above Head of Passes 

on the Mississippi River). 

 

‡ See 33 CFR 89.25, provided for reference on page 145 of this handbook.
60

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25 

Sailing Vessels Underway and Vessels Under Oars 

(a) A sailing vessel underway shall exhibit: 

(i) sidelights; 

(ii) a sternlight. 

(b) In a sailing vessel of less than 20 meters in length the lights prescribed in 

paragraph (a) of this Rule may be combined in one lantern carried at or near the 

top of the mast where it can best be seen. 

Sailing vessel underway. Same for Inland. 
61

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25 

Sailing vessels underway and vessels under oars 

§ 83.25

(a) A sailing vessel underway shall exhibit: 

(i) Sidelights; and 

(ii) A sternlight. 

(b) In a sailing vessel of less than 20 meters in length the lights prescribed in 

paragraph (a) of this Rule may be combined in one lantern carried at or near the 

top of the mast where it can best be seen. 

Sailing vessel underway—less than 20 meters in length. 

Same for International. 
62

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25—CONTINUED 

(c) A sailing vessel underway may, in addition to the lights prescribed in 

paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit at or near the top of the mast, where they can 

best be seen, two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the 

lower green, but these lights shall not be exhibited in conjunction with the 

combined lantern permitted by paragraph (b) of this Rule. 

Sailing vessel underway. Same for Inland. 
63

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25—CONTINUED 

(c) A sailing vessel underway may, in addition to the lights prescribed in 

paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit at or near the top of the mast, where they can 

best be seen, two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the 

lower green, but these lights shall not be exhibited in conjunction with the 

combined lantern permitted by paragraph (b) of this Rule. 
64

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25—CONTINUED 

(d) (i) A sailing vessel of less than 7 meters in length shall, if practicable, exhibit 

the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or (b) of this Rule, but if she does not, 

she shall have ready at hand an electric torch or lighted lantern showing a 

white light which shall be exhibited in sufficient time to prevent collision. 

(ii) A vessel under oars may exhibit the lights prescribed in this Rule for 

sailing vessels, but if she does not, she shall have ready at hand an electric 

torch or lighted lantern showing a white light which shall be exhibited in 

sufficient time to prevent collision. 

Sailing vessel underway—less than 7 meters in length. 

Same for Inland. 
65

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25—CONTINUED 

(d) (i) A sailing vessel of less than 7 meters in length shall, if practicable, exhibit 

the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or (b) of this Rule, but if she does not, 

she shall exhibit an all-round white light or have ready at hand an electric 

torch or lighted lantern showing a white light which shall be exhibited in 

sufficient time to prevent collision. 

(ii) A vessel under oars may exhibit the lights prescribed in this Rule for 

sailing vessels, but if she does not, she shall exhibit an all-round white light 

or have ready at hand an electric torch or lighted lantern showing a white 

light which shall be exhibited in sufficient time to prevent collision. 

Vessel under oars. 

Same for International. 
66

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25—CONTINUED 

(e) A vessel proceeding under sail when also being propelled by machinery shall 

exhibit forward where it can best be seen a conical shape, apex downwards. 

Vessel proceeding under sail when also being propelled by 

machinery. Same for Inland except that a vessel of less than 

12 meters in length is not required to exhibit the dayshape. 
67

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 25—CONTINUED 

(e) A vessel proceeding under sail when also being propelled by machinery shall 

exhibit forward where it can best be seen a conical shape, apex downward. A 

vessel of less than 12 meters in length is not required to exhibit this shape, but 

may do so. 
68

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 26 

Fishing Vessels 

(a) A vessel engaged in fishing, whether underway or at anchor, shall exhibit 

only the lights and shapes prescribed in this Rule. 

(b) A vessel when engaged in trawling, by which is meant the dragging through 

the water of a dredge net or other apparatus used as a fishing appliance, shall 

exhibit: 

(i) two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being green and the lower 

white, or a shape consisting of two cones with their apexes together in a 

vertical line one above the other; 

(ii) a masthead light abaft of and higher than the all-round green light; a 

vessel of less than 50 meters in length shall not be obliged to exhibit such a 

light but may do so; 

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed 

in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight. 

Vessel engaged in trawling—making way; vessel less than 50 meters in 

length. 

Same for Inland. 

Vessel engaged in trawling – making way; 50 meters or greater in length. 

Same for Inland. 
69

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 26 

Fishing vessels 

§ 83.26

(a) A vessel engaged in fishing, whether underway or at anchor, shall exhibit 

only the lights and shapes prescribed in this Rule. 

(b) A vessel when engaged in trawling, by which is meant the dragging through 

the water of a dredge net or other apparatus used as a fishing appliance, shall 

exhibit: 

(i) Two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being green and the 

lower white, or a shape consisting of two cones with their apexes together 

in a vertical line one above the other; 

(ii) A masthead light abaft of and higher than the all-round green light; a 

vessel of less than 50 meters in length shall not be obliged to exhibit such a 

light but may do so; 

(iii) When making way through the water, in addition to the lights 

prescribed in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight. 

Vessel engaged in trawling—not making way; vessel less than 50 meters 

in length. 

Same for International. 

Vessel engaged in trawling—not making way; 50 meters or greater in 

length. 

Same for International. 
70

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 26—CONTINUED 

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing, other than trawling, shall exhibit: 

(i) two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the lower 

white, or a shape consisting of two cones with apexes together in a vertical 

line one above the other; 

(ii) when there is outlying gear extending more than 150 meters horizontally 

from the vessel, an all-round white light or a cone apex upwards in the 

direction of the gear; 

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed 

in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight. 

(d) The additional signals described in Annex II to these Rules apply to a vessel 

engaged in fishing in close proximity to other vessels engaged in fishing. 

Vessel engaged in fishing other than trawling—making way. 

Same for Inland. 
71

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 26—CONTINUED 

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing, other than trawling, shall exhibit: 

(i) Two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the lower 

white, or a shape consisting of two cones with apexes together in a vertical 

line one above the other; 

(ii) When there is outlying gear extending more than 150 meters 

horizontally from the vessel, an all-round white light or a cone apex upward 

in the direction of the gear; and 

(iii) When making way through the water, in addition to the lights 

prescribed in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight. 

(d) [Reserved]

Vessel engaged in fishing other than trawling—not making way. 

Same for International.
72

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 26—CONTINUED 

(e) A vessel when not engaged in fishing shall not exhibit the lights or shapes 

prescribed in this Rule, but only those prescribed for a vessel of her length. 
73

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 26—CONTINUED 

(e) A vessel not engaged in fishing shall not exhibit the lights or shapes 

prescribed in this Rule, but only those prescribed for a vessel of her length. 

(f) Additional signals for fishing vessels in close proximity: 

(i) The lights mentioned herein shall be placed where they can best be seen. 

They shall be at least 0.9 meters apart but at a lower level than lights 

prescribed in this Rule. The lights shall be visible all around the horizon at 

a distance of at least 1 mile but at a lesser distance from the lights prescribed 

by these Rules for fishing vessels. 

(ii) Signals for trawlers. 

 (1) Vessels when engaged in trawling, whether using demersal or 

pelagic gear, may exhibit: 

(A) When shooting their nets: two white lights in a vertical line; 

(B) When hauling their nets: one white light over one red light in 

a vertical line; 

(C) When the net has come fast upon an obstruction: two red 

lights in a vertical line. 

 (2) Each vessel engaged in pair trawling may exhibit: 

(A) By night, a searchlight directed forward and in the direction of 

the other vessel of the pair; 

(B) When shooting or hauling their nets or when their nets have 

come fast upon an obstruction, the lights prescribed in paragraph 

(1) of this Rule. 

(iii) Signals for purse seiners.

(1) Vessels engaged in fishing with purse seine gear may exhibit two 

yellow lights in a vertical line. These lights shall flash alternately every 

second and with equal light and occultation duration. These lights may 

be exhibited only when the vessel is hampered by its fishing gear. 

(2) [Reserved] 
74

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27 

Vessels Not Under Command or Restricted in Their 

Ability to Maneuver 

(a) A vessel not under command shall exhibit: 

(i) two all-round red lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen; 

(ii) two balls or similar shapes in a vertical line where they can best be seen; 

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed 

in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight. 

Vessel not under command—not making way. Same for Inland.
75

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27 

Vessels not under command or restricted in their 

ability to maneuver 

§ 83.27

(a) A vessel not under command shall exhibit: 

(i) Two all-round red lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen; 

(ii) Two balls or similar shapes in a vertical line where they can best be seen; 

and 

(iii) When making way through the water, in addition to the lights 

prescribed in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight. 

Vessel not under command—making way. Same for International.
76

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(b) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver, except a vessel engaged in 

mine clearance operations, shall exhibit: 

(i) three all-round lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The 

highest and lowest of these lights shall be red and the middle light shall be 

white; 

(ii) three shapes in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The highest 

and lowest of these shapes shall be balls and the middle one a diamond; 

(iii) when making way through the water, a masthead light or lights, 

sidelights and a sternlight, in addition to the lights prescribed in 

subparagraph (i); 

(iv) when at anchor, in addition to the lights or shapes prescribed in 

subparagraphs (i) and (ii), the light, lights or shape prescribed in Rule 30. 

Vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver—making way; vessel 

less than 50 meters in length. Same for Inland.
77

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(b) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver, except a vessel engaged in 

mine clearance operations, shall exhibit: 

(i) Three all-round lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The 

highest and lowest of these lights shall be red and the middle light shall be 

white; 

(ii) Three shapes in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The highest 

and lowest of these shapes shall be balls and the middle one a diamond; 

(iii) When making way through the water, a masthead light or lights, 

sidelights and a sternlight, in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph 

(b)(i) of this Rule; and 

(iv) When at anchor, in addition to the lights or shapes prescribed in 

paragraphs (b)(i) and (ii), the light, lights or shapes prescribed in Rule 30 

(§ 83.30). 

Vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver—at anchor; vessel less 

than 50 meters in length. Same for International.
78

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(c) A power-driven vessel engaged in a towing operation such as severely 

restricts the towing vessel and her tow in their ability to deviate from their course 

shall, in addition to the lights or shapes prescribed in Rule 24(a), exhibit the lights 

or shapes prescribed in subparagraphs (b)(i) and (ii) of this Rule. 
79

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(c) A vessel engaged in a towing operation which severely restricts the towing 

vessel and her tow in their ability to deviate from their course shall, in addition 

to the lights or shapes prescribed in subparagraphs (b)(i) and (ii) of this Rule, 

exhibit the lights or shape prescribed in Rule 24 (§ 83.24). 

Vessel engaged in towing operation which severely restricts towing vessel and 

her tow in their ability to deviate from their course—length of tow does not 

exceed 200 meters; towing vessel less than 50 meters in length. 

Same for International.
80

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(d) A vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations, when restricted in 

her ability to maneuver, shall exhibit the lights and shapes prescribed in 

subparagraphs (b)(i), (ii) and (iii) of this Rule and shall in addition, when an 

obstruction exists, exhibit: 

(i) two all-round red lights or two balls in a vertical line to indicate the side 

on which the obstruction exists; 

(ii) two all-round green lights or two diamonds in a vertical line to indicate 

the side on which another vessel may pass; 

(iii) when at anchor, the lights or shapes prescribed in this paragraph instead 

of the lights or shape prescribed in Rule 30. 

Vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations when restricted in 

ability to maneuver—making way with an obstruction on the starboard 

side. Same for Inland. 

Vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations when restricted in ability 

to maneuver—not making way with an obstruction on the starboard side. 

Same for Inland.
81

—INLAND—

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(d) A vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations, when restricted in 

her ability to maneuver, shall exhibit the lights and shapes prescribed in 

subparagraphs (b)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this Rule and shall in addition, when an 

obstruction exists, exhibit: 

(i) Two all-round red lights or two balls in a vertical line to indicate the side 

on which the obstruction exists; 

(ii) Two all-round green lights or two diamonds in a vertical line to indicate 

the side on which another vessel may pass; and 

(iii) When at anchor, the lights or shape prescribed by this paragraph, 

instead of the lights or shape prescribed in Rule 30 (§ 83.30). 

(iv) Dredge pipelines that are floating or supported on trestles shall display 

the following lights at night and in periods of restricted visibility. 

(1) One row of yellow lights. The lights must be: 

(A) Flashing 50 to 70 times per minute, 

(B) Visible all around the horizon, 

(C) Visible for at least 2 miles, 

(D) Not less than 1 and not more than 3.5 meters above the water, 

(E) Approximately equally spaced, and 

(F) Not more than 10 meters apart where the pipeline crosses a 

navigable channel. Where the pipeline does not cross a navigable 

channel the lights must be sufficient in number to clearly show the 

pipeline’s length and course. 

(2) Two red lights at each end of the pipeline, including the ends in a 

channel where the pipeline is separated to allow vessels to pass (whether 

open or closed). The lights must be: 

(A) Visible all around the horizon, and 

(B) Visible for at least 2 miles, and 

(C) One meter apart in a vertical line with the lower light at the 

same height above the water as the flashing yellow light. 
82

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(e) Whenever the size of a vessel engaged in diving operations makes it 

impracticable to exhibit all lights and shapes prescribed in paragraph (d) of this 

Rule, the following shall be exhibited: 

(i) three all-round lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The 

highest and lowest of these lights shall be red and the middle light shall be 

white; 

(ii) a rigid replica of the International Code flag “A” not less than 1 meter 

in height. Measures shall be taken to ensure its all-round visibility. 

Small vessel engaged in diving operations by day. 

Same for Inland.
83

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(e) Whenever the size of a vessel engaged in diving operations makes it 

impracticable to exhibit all lights and shapes prescribed in paragraph (d) of this 

Rule, as appropriate, the following shall instead be exhibited: 

(i) Three all-round lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The 

highest and lowest of these lights shall be red and the middle light shall be 

white; 

(ii) A rigid replica of the International Code flag “A” not less than 1 meter 

in height. Measures shall be taken to ensure its all-round visibility. 

Small vessel engaged in diving operations at night or in restricted visibility. 

Same for International.
84

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(f) A vessel engaged in mine clearance operations shall, in addition to the lights 

prescribed for a power-driven vessel in Rule 23 or to the lights or shape 

prescribed for a vessel at anchor in Rule 30 as appropriate, exhibit three all-round 

green lights or three balls. One of these lights or shapes shall be exhibited near 

the foremast head and one at each end of the fore yard. These lights or shapes 

indicate that it is dangerous for another vessel to approach within 1000 meters of 

the mine clearance vessel. 

Vessel engaged in mine clearance operations—vessel less than 50 

meters in length. Same for Inland. 

(g) Vessels of less than 12 meters in length, except those engaged in diving 

operations, shall not be required to exhibit the lights and shapes prescribed in 

this Rule. 

(h) The signals prescribed in this Rule are not signals of vessels in distress and 

requiring assistance. Such signals are contained in Annex IV to these Regulations.

 
85

—INLAND—

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 27—CONTINUED 

(f) A vessel engaged in mine clearance operations shall, in addition to the lights 

prescribed for a power-driven vessel in Rule 23 (§ 83.23) or to the lights or shape 

prescribed for a vessel at anchor in Rule 30 (§ 83.30), as appropriate, exhibit three 

all-round green lights or three balls. One of these lights or shapes shall be 

exhibited near the foremast head and one at each end of the fore yard. These 

lights or shapes indicate that it is dangerous for another vessel to approach within 

1000 meters of the mine clearance vessel. 

Vessel engaged in mine clearance operations. 

Same for International. 

(g) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length, except when engaged in diving 

operations, is not required to exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in this Rule. 

(h) The signals prescribed in this Rule are not signals of vessels in distress and 

requiring assistance. Such signals are contained in Annex IV to these Rules (33 

CFR part 87). 
86

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 28 

Vessels Constrained by Their Draft 

A vessel constrained by her draft may, in addition to the lights prescribed for 

power-driven vessels in Rule 23, exhibit where they can best be seen three allround red lights in a vertical line, or a cylinder. 

Vessel constrained by her draft—underway – 

50 meters or greater in length.
87

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 28 

[Reserved]
88

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 29 

Pilot Vessels 

(a) A vessel engaged on pilotage duty shall exhibit: 

(i) at or near the masthead, two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper 

being white and the lower red; 

(ii) when underway, in addition, sidelights and a sternlight; 

(iii) when at anchor, in addition to the lights prescribed in subparagraph (i), 

the anchor light, lights, or shape prescribed in Rule 30 for vessels at anchor. 

(b) A pilot vessel when not engaged on pilotage duty shall exhibit the lights or 

shapes prescribed for a similar vessel of her length. 

Vessel engaged on pilotage duty—underway. 

Same for Inland. 
89

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 29 

Pilot vessels 

§ 83.29

(a) A vessel engaged on pilotage duty shall exhibit: 

(i) At or near the masthead, two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper 

being white and the lower red; 

(ii) When underway, in addition, sidelights and a sternlight; and 

(iii) When at anchor, in addition to the lights prescribed in subparagraph (i) 

of this Rule, the anchor light, lights, or shape prescribed in Rule 30 (§ 83.30) 

for vessels at anchor. 

(b) A pilot vessel when not engaged on pilotage duty shall exhibit the lights or 

shapes prescribed for a vessel of her length. 

Vessel engaged on pilotage duty—at anchor; vessel of less than 

50 meters in length. Same for International.
90

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 30 

Anchored Vessels and Vessels Aground 

(a) A vessel at anchor shall exhibit where it can best be seen: 

(i) in the fore part, an all-round white light or one ball; 

(ii) at or near the stern and at a lower level than the light prescribed in 

subparagraph (i), an all-round white light. 

(b) A vessel of less than 50 meters in length may exhibit an all-round white light 

where it can best be seen instead of the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this 

Rule. 

(c) A vessel at anchor may, and a vessel of 100 meters and more in length shall, 

also use the available working or equivalent lights to illuminate her decks. 

Vessel at anchor—less than 50 meters in length. 

Same for Inland.
91

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 30 

Vessels anchored, aground and moored barges 

§ 83.30

(a) A vessel at anchor shall exhibit where it can best be seen: 

(i) In the fore part, an all-round white light or one ball; 

(ii) At or near the stern and at a lower level than the light prescribed in 

paragraph (i) of this Rule, an all-round white light. 

(b) A vessel of less than 50 meters in length may exhibit an all-round white light 

where it can best be seen instead of the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this 

Rule. 

(c) A vessel at anchor may, and a vessel of 100 meters or more in length shall, 

also use the available working or equivalent lights to illuminate her decks. 

Vessel at anchor with deck illumination. 

Same for International.
92

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 30—CONTINUED 

(d) A vessel aground shall exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or (b) 

of this Rule and in addition, where they can best be seen: 

(i) two all-round red lights in a vertical line; 

(ii) three balls in a vertical line. 

Vessel aground. Same for Inland. 

(e) A vessel of less than 7 meters in length, when at anchor, not in or near a 

narrow channel, fairway or anchorage, or where other vessels normally navigate, 

shall not be required to exhibit the lights or shape prescribed in paragraphs (a) 

and (b) of this Rule. 

(f) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length, when aground, shall not be required 

to exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in subparagraphs (d)(i) and (ii) of this 

Rule. 
93

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 30—CONTINUED 

(d) A vessel aground shall exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or (b) 

of this Rule and in addition, if practicable, where they can best be seen: 

(i) Two all-round red lights in a vertical line; and 

(ii) Three balls in a vertical line. 

Vessel aground—less than 50 meters in length. 

Same for International. 

(e) A vessel of less than 7 meters in length, when at anchor, not in or near a 

narrow channel, fairway, anchorage, or where other vessels normally navigate, 

shall not be required to exhibit the lights or shape prescribed in paragraphs (a) 

and (b) of this Rule. 

(f) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length when aground shall not be required 

to exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in paragraphs (d)(i) and (ii) of this Rule. 

(g) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length, when at anchor in a special 

anchorage area designated by the Coast Guard ‡, shall not be required to exhibit 

the anchor lights and shapes required by this Rule. 

(h) The following barges shall display at night and if practicable in periods of 

restricted visibility the lights described in paragraph (i) of this Rule: 

(i) Every barge projecting into a buoyed or restricted channel. 

(ii) Every barge so moored that it reduces the available navigable width of 

any channel to less than 80 meters. 

(iii) Barges moored in groups more than two barges wide or to a maximum 

width of over 25 meters. 

(iv) Every barge not moored parallel to the bank or dock. 

 

‡ See 33 CFR 110 Subpart A
94

—INTERNATIONAL—

Lights and Shapes 

[BLANK] 
95

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 30—CONTINUED 

(i) Barges described in paragraph (h) of this Rule shall carry two unobstructed 

all-round white lights of an intensity to be visible for at least 1 nautical mile and 

meeting the technical requirements as prescribed in Annex I (33 CFR part 84). 

(j) A barge or a group of barges at anchor or made fast to one or more mooring 

buoys or other similar device, in lieu of the provisions of this Rule, may carry 

unobstructed all-round white lights of an intensity to be visible for at least 1 

nautical mile that meet the requirements of Annex I (33 CFR part 84) and shall 

be arranged as follows: 

(i) Any barge that projects from a group formation, shall be lighted on its 

outboard corners. 

(ii) On a single barge moored in water where other vessels normally 

navigate on both sides of the barge, lights shall be placed to mark the corner 

extremities of the barge. 

(iii) On barges moored in group formation, moored in water where other 

vessels normally navigate on both sides of the group, lights shall be placed 

to mark the corner extremities of the group. 

(k) The following are exempt from the requirements of this Rule: 

(i) A barge or group of barges moored in a slip or slough used primarily for 

mooring purposes. 

(ii) A barge or group of barges moored behind a pierhead. 

(iii) A barge less than 20 meters in length when moored in a special 

anchorage area designated in accordance with § 109.10 of this chapter. 

(l) Barges moored in well-illuminated areas are exempt from the lighting 

requirements of this Rule. These areas are as follows: 

CHICAGO SANITARY 

SHIP CANAL 

(1) Mile 293.2 to 293.9 

(2) Mile 295.2 to 296.1 

(3) Mile 297.5 to 297.8 

(4) Mile 298 to 298.2 

(5) Mile 298.6 to 298.8 

(6) Mile 299.3 to 299.4 

(7) Mile 299.8 to 300.5 

(8) Mile 303 to 303.2 

(9) Mile 303.7 to 303.9 

(10) Mile 305.7 to 305.8 

(11) Mile 310.7 to 310.9 

(12) Mile 311 to 311.2 

(13) Mile 312.5 to 312.6 

(14) Mile 313.8 to 314.2 

(15) Mile 314.6 

(16) Mile 314.8 to 315.3 

(17) Mile 315.7 to 316 

(18) Mile 316.8 

(19) Mile 316.85 to 317.05 

(20) Mile 317.5 

(21) Mile 318.4 to 318.9 

(22) Mile 318.7 to 318.8 

(23) Mile 320 to 320.3 

(24) Mile 320.6 

(25) Mile 322.3.6 to 322.4 

(26) Mile 322.8 

(27) Mile 322.9 to 327.2 

CALUMET SAG 

CHANNEL 

(28) Mile 316.5 

LITTLE CALUMET 

RIVER 

(29) Mile 321.2 

(30) Mile 322.3 

CALUMET RIVER 

(31) Mile 328.5 to 328.7 

(32) Mile 329.2 to 329.4 

(33) Mile 330 west bank to 

330.2 

(34) Mile 331.4 to 331.6 

(35) Mile 332.2 to 332.4 

(36) Mile 332.6 to 332.8 

CUMBERLAND 

RIVER 

(37) Mile 126.8 

(38) Mile 191 
96

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 31 

Seaplanes 

Where it is impracticable for a seaplane or a WIG craft to exhibit lights and 

shapes of the characteristics or in the positions prescribed in the Rules of this 

Part she shall exhibit lights and shapes as closely similar in characteristics and 

position as is possible. 

PART D—SOUND AND LIGHT SIGNALS 

Rule 32 

Definitions 

(a) The word whistle means any sound signaling appliance capable of producing 

the prescribed blasts and which complies with the specifications in Annex III to 

these Regulations. 

(b) The term short blast means a blast of about one second’s duration. 

(c) The term prolonged blast means a blast of from four to six seconds’ duration. 

Rule 33 

Equipment for Sound Signals 

(a) A vessel of 12 meters or more in length shall be provided with a whistle, a 

vessel of 20 meters or more in length shall be provided with a bell in addition to 

a whistle, and a vessel of 100 meters or more in length shall, in addition, be 

provided with a gong, the tone and sound of which cannot be confused with that 

of the bell. The whistle, bell and gong shall comply with the specifications in 

Annex III to these Regulations. The bell or gong or both may be replaced by 

other equipment having the same respective sound characteristics, provided that 

manual sounding of the prescribed signals shall always be possible. 

(b) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length shall not be obliged to carry the 

sound signaling appliances prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule but if she does 

not, she shall be provided with some other means of making an efficient sound 

signal. 
97

—INLAND— 

Lights and Shapes 

Rule 31 

Seaplanes 

§ 83.31

Where it is impracticable for a seaplane or a WIG craft to exhibit lights and 

shapes of the characteristics or in the positions prescribed in the Rules of this 

subpart, she shall exhibit lights and shapes as closely similar in characteristics and 

position as is possible. 

SUBPART D—SOUND AND LIGHT SIGNALS 

Rule 32 

Definitions 

§ 83.32

(a) The word whistle means any sound signaling appliance capable of producing 

the prescribed blasts and which complies with specifications in Annex III to these 

Rules (33 CFR part 86). 

(b) The term short blast means a blast of about 1 second’s duration. 

(c) The term prolonged blast means a blast of from 4 to 6 seconds’ duration. 

Rule 33 

Equipment for Sound Signals 

§ 83.33

(a) A vessel of 12 meters or more in length shall be provided with a whistle, a 

vessel of 20 meters or more in length shall be provided with a bell in addition to 

a whistle, and a vessel of 100 meters or more in length shall, in addition, be 

provided with a gong, the tone and sound of which cannot be confused with that 

of the bell. The whistle, bell and gong shall comply with the specifications in 

Annex III to these Rules (33 CFR part 86). The bell or gong or both may be 

replaced by other equipment having the same respective sound characteristics, 

provided that manual sounding of the prescribed signals shall always be possible. 

(b) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length shall not be obliged to carry the 

sound signaling appliances prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule but if she does 

not, she shall be provided with some other means of making an efficient sound 

signal. 

 
98

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 34 

Maneuvering and Warning Signals 

(a) When vessels are in sight of one another, a power-driven vessel underway, 

when maneuvering as authorized or required by these Rules, shall indicate that 

maneuver by the following signals on her whistle: 

 one short blast to mean “I am altering my course to starboard”; 

 two short blasts to mean “I am altering my course to port”; 

 three short blasts to mean “I am operating astern propulsion”. 

(b) Any vessel may supplement the whistle signals prescribed in paragraph (a) of this 

Rule by light signals, repeated as appropriate, while the maneuver is being carried out: 

(i) these light signals shall have the following significance: 

 one flash to mean “I am altering my course to starboard”; 

 two flashes to mean “I am altering my course to port”; 

 three flashes to mean “I am operating astern propulsion”; 

(ii) the duration of each flash shall be about one second, the interval between 

flashes shall be about one second, and the interval between successive signals 

shall be not less than ten seconds; 

(iii) the light used for this signal shall, if fitted, be an all-round white light, visible 

at a minimum range of 5 miles, and shall comply with the provisions of Annex I 

to these Regulations. 

(c) When in sight of one another in a narrow channel or fairway: 

(i) a vessel intending to overtake another shall in compliance with Rule 9(e)(i) 

indicate her intention by the following signals on her whistle: 

 two prolonged blasts followed by one short blast to mean “I intend to 

overtake you on your starboard side”; 

 two prolonged blasts followed by two short blasts to mean “I intend to 

overtake you on your port side”. 

(ii) the vessel about to be overtaken when acting in accordance with Rule 9(e)(i) 

shall indicate her agreement by the following signal on her whistle: 

 one prolonged, one short, one prolonged and one short blast, in that order. 
99

—INLAND— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 34 

Maneuvering and Warning Signals 

§ 83.34

(a) When power-driven vessels are in sight of one another and meeting or 

crossing at a distance within half a mile of each other, each vessel underway, when 

maneuvering as authorized or required by these Rules: 

(i) Shall indicate that maneuver by the following signals on her whistle: 

(1) One short blast to mean “I intend to leave you on my port side”; 

(2) Two short blasts to mean “I intend to leave you on my starboard 

side”; and 

(3) Three short blasts to mean “I am operating astern propulsion”. 

(ii) Upon hearing the one or two blast signal of the other shall, if in 

agreement, sound the same whistle signal and take the steps necessary to 

effect a safe passing. If, however, from any cause, the vessel doubts the 

safety of the proposed maneuver, she shall sound the signal specified in 

paragraph (d) of this Rule and each vessel shall take appropriate 

precautionary action until a safe passing agreement is made. 

(b) A vessel may supplement the whistle signals prescribed in paragraph (a) of this 

Rule by light signals: 

(i) These signals shall have the following significance: 

(1) One flash to mean “I intend to leave you on my port side”; 

(2) Two flashes to mean “I intend to leave you on my starboard side”; 

(3) Three flashes to mean “I am operating astern propulsion”; 

(ii) The duration of each flash shall be about 1 second; and 

(iii) The light used for this signal shall, if fitted, be one all-round white or yellow 

light, visible at a minimum range of 2 miles, synchronized with the whistle, and 

shall comply with the provisions of Annex I to these Rules (33 CFR part 84). 

(c) When in sight of one another: 

(i) A power-driven vessel intending to overtake another power-driven vessel 

shall indicate her intention by the following signals on her whistle: 

(1) One short blast to mean “I intend to overtake you on your starboard 

side”; 

(2) Two short blasts to mean “I intend to overtake you on your port side”; 

and 

(ii) The power-driven vessel about to be overtaken shall, if in agreement, sound 

a similar sound signal. If in doubt she shall sound the signal prescribed in 

paragraph (d) of this Rule. 
100

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 34—CONTINUED 

(d) When vessels in sight of one another are approaching each other and from 

any cause either vessel fails to understand the intentions or actions of the other, 

or is in doubt whether sufficient action is being taken by the other to avoid 

collision, the vessel in doubt shall immediately indicate such doubt by giving at 

least five short and rapid blasts on the whistle. Such signal may be supplemented 

by a light signal of at least five short and rapid flashes. 

(e) A vessel nearing a bend or an area of a channel or fairway where other 

vessels may be obscured by an intervening obstruction shall sound one prolonged 

blast. Such signal shall be answered with a prolonged blast by any approaching 

vessel that may be within hearing around the bend or behind the intervening 

obstruction. 

(f) If whistles are fitted on a vessel at a distance apart of more than 100 meters, 

one whistle only shall be used for giving maneuvering and warning signals. 
101

—INLAND— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 34—CONTINUED 

(d) When vessels in sight of one another are approaching each other and, from 

any cause, either vessel fails to understand the intentions or actions of the other, 

or is in doubt whether sufficient action is being taken by the other to avoid 

collision, the vessel in doubt shall immediately indicate such doubt by giving at 

least five short and rapid blasts on the whistle. Such signal may be supplemented 

by a light signal of at least five short and rapid flashes. 

(e) A vessel nearing a bend or an area of a channel or fairway where other 

vessels may be obscured by an intervening obstruction shall sound one prolonged 

blast. This signal shall be answered with a prolonged blast by any approaching 

vessel that may be within hearing around the bend or behind the intervening 

obstruction. 

(f) If whistles are fitted on a vessel at a distance apart of more than 100 meters, 

one whistle only shall be used for giving maneuvering and warning signals. 

(g) When a power-driven vessel is leaving a dock or berth, she shall sound one 

prolonged blast. 

(h) A vessel that reaches agreement with another vessel in a head-on, crossing, 

or overtaking situation, as for example, by using the radiotelephone as prescribed 

by the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act (85 Stat. 164; 33 U.S.C. 1201 

et seq.), is not obliged to sound the whistle signals prescribed by this Rule, but may 

do so. If agreement is not reached, then whistle signals shall be exchanged in a 

timely manner and shall prevail. 
102

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 35 

Sound Signals in Restricted Visibility 

In or near an area of restricted visibility, whether by day or night, the signals 

prescribed in this Rule shall be used as follows: 

(a) A power-driven vessel making way through the water shall sound at intervals 

of not more than 2 minutes one prolonged blast. 

(b) A power-driven vessel underway but stopped and making no way through 

the water shall sound at intervals of not more than 2 minutes two prolonged 

blasts in succession with an interval of about 2 seconds between them. 

(c) A vessel not under command, a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver, 

a vessel constrained by her draft, a sailing vessel, a vessel engaged in fishing and 

a vessel engaged in towing or pushing another vessel shall, instead of the signals 

prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this Rule, sound at intervals of not more 

than 2 minutes three blasts in succession, namely one prolonged followed by two 

short blasts. 

(d) A vessel engaged in fishing, when at anchor, and a vessel restricted in her 

ability to maneuver when carrying out her work at anchor, shall instead of the 

signals prescribed in paragraph (g) of this Rule sound the signal prescribed in 

paragraph (c) of this Rule. 

(e) A vessel towed or if more than one vessel is towed the last vessel of the 

tow, if manned, shall at intervals of not more than 2 minutes sound four blasts in 

succession, namely one prolonged followed by three short blasts. When 

practicable, this signal shall be made immediately after the signal made by the 

towing vessel. 

(f) When a pushing vessel and a vessel being pushed ahead are rigidly 

connected in a composite unit they shall be regarded as a power-driven vessel 

and shall give the signals prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this Rule. 
103

—INLAND— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 35 

Sound Signals in Restricted Visibility 

§ 83.35

In or near an area of restricted visibility, whether by day or night, the signals 

prescribed in this Rule shall be used as follows: 

(a) A power-driven vessel making way through the water shall sound at intervals 

of not more than 2 minutes, one prolonged blast. 

(b) A power-driven vessel underway but stopped and making no way through 

the water shall sound, at intervals of not more than 2 minutes, two prolonged 

blasts in succession, with an interval of about 2 seconds between them. 

(c) A vessel not under command; a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver, 

whether underway or at anchor; a sailing vessel; a vessel engaged in fishing, 

whether underway or at anchor; and a vessel engaged in towing or pushing 

another vessel shall, instead of the signals prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of 

this Rule, sound at intervals of not more than 2 minutes, three blasts in 

succession, namely, one prolonged followed by two short blasts. 

(d) [Reserved] 

(e) A vessel towed or if more than one vessel is towed the last vessel of the 

tow, if manned, shall at intervals of not more than 2 minutes sound four blasts in 

succession, namely, one prolonged followed by three short blasts. When 

practicable, this signal shall be made immediately after the signal made by the 

towing vessel. 

(f) When a pushing vessel and a vessel being pushed ahead are rigidly 

connected in a composite unit they shall be regarded as a power-driven vessel 

and shall give the signals prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this Rule. 
104

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 35—CONTINUED 

(g) A vessel at anchor shall at intervals of not more than one minute ring the 

bell rapidly for about 5 seconds. In a vessel of 100 meters or more in length the 

bell shall be sounded in the forepart of the vessel and immediately after the 

ringing of the bell the gong shall be sounded rapidly for about 5 seconds in the 

after part of the vessel. A vessel at anchor may in addition sound three blasts in 

succession, namely one short, one prolonged and one short blast, to give warning 

of her position and of the possibility of collision to an approaching vessel. 

(h) A vessel aground shall give the bell signal and if required the gong signal 

prescribed in paragraph (g) of this Rule and shall, in addition, give three separate 

and distinct strokes on the bell immediately before and after the rapid ringing of 

the bell. A vessel aground may in addition sound an appropriate whistle signal. 

(i) A vessel of 12 meters or more but less than 20 meters in length shall not be 

obliged to give the bell signals prescribed in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this Rule. 

However, if she does not, she shall make some other efficient sound signal at 

intervals of not more than 2 minutes. 

(j) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length shall not be obliged to give the 

above-mentioned signals but, if she does not, shall make some other efficient 

sound signal at intervals of not more than 2 minutes. 

(k) A pilot vessel when engaged on pilotage duty may in addition to the signals 

prescribed in paragraphs (a), (b) or (g) of this Rule sound an identity signal 

consisting of four short blasts. 

Rule 36 

Signals to Attract Attention 

If necessary to attract the attention of another vessel, any vessel may make light 

or sound signals that cannot be mistaken for any signal authorized elsewhere in 

these Rules, or may direct the beam of her searchlight in the direction of the 

danger, in such a way as not to embarrass any vessel. Any light to attract the 

attention of another vessel shall be such that it cannot be mistaken for any aid to 

navigation. For the purpose of this Rule the use of high intensity intermittent or 

revolving lights, such as strobe lights, shall be avoided.
105

—INLAND— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 35—CONTINUED 

(g) A vessel at anchor shall at intervals of not more than 1 minute ring the bell 

rapidly for about 5 seconds. In a vessel of 100 meters or more in length the bell 

shall be sounded in the forepart of the vessel and immediately after the ringing 

of the bell the gong shall be sounded rapidly for about 5 seconds in the after part 

of the vessel. A vessel at anchor may in addition sound three blasts in succession, 

namely, one short, one prolonged and one short blast, to give warning of her 

position and of the possibility of collision to an approaching vessel. 

(h) A vessel aground shall give the bell signal and if required the gong signal 

prescribed in paragraph (g) of this Rule and shall, in addition, give three separate 

and distinct strokes on the bell immediately before and after the rapid ringing of 

the bell. A vessel aground may in addition sound an appropriate whistle signal. 

(i) A vessel of 12 meters or more but less than 20 meters in length shall not be 

obliged to give the bell signals prescribed in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this Rule. 

However, if she does not, she shall make some other efficient sound signal at 

intervals of not more than 2 minutes. 

(j) A vessel of less than 12 meters in length shall not be obliged to give the bell 

signals prescribed in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this Rule. However, if she does 

not, shall make some other efficient sound signal at intervals of not more than 2 

minutes. 

(k) A pilot vessel when engaged on pilotage duty may, in addition to the signals 

prescribed in paragraphs (a), (b) or (g) of this Rule, sound an identity signal 

consisting of four short blasts. 

(l) The following vessels shall not be required to sound signals as prescribed in 

paragraph (g) of this Rule when anchored in a special anchorage area designated 

by the Coast Guard: 

(i) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length; and 

(ii) A barge, canal boat, scow, or other nondescript craft. 

Rule 36 

Signals to Attract Attention 

§ 83.36

If necessary to attract the attention of another vessel, any vessel may make light 

or sound signals that cannot be mistaken for any signal authorized elsewhere in 

these Rules, or may direct the beam of her searchlight in the direction of the 

danger, in such a way as not to embarrass any vessel. 
106

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 37 

Distress Signals 

When a vessel is in distress and requires assistance she shall use or exhibit the 

signals described in Annex IV to these Regulations. 

DISTRESS SIGNALS 

72 COLREGS 
107

—INLAND— 

Sound and Light Signals 

Rule 37 

Distress Signals 

§ 83.37

When a vessel is in distress and requires assistance she shall use or exhibit the 

signals described in Annex IV of these Rules (33 CFR part 87)*. 

A high intensity white light flashing at regular intervals 

from 50 to 70 times per minute. 

Inland only.

 

* The distress signals for inland waters are the same as those displayed on the facing page for 

international waters, with the exception of this high intensity flashing white light.
108

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Exemptions 

PART E—EXEMPTIONS 

Rule 38 

Exemptions ‡

Any vessel (or class of vessels) provided that she complies with the 

requirements of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 

1960, the keel of which is laid or which is at a corresponding stage of construction 

before the entry into force of these Regulations may be exempted from 

compliance therewith as follows: 

(a) The installation of lights with ranges prescribed in Rule 22, until four years 

after the date of entry into force of these Regulations. 

(b) The installation of lights with color specifications as prescribed in Section 

7 of annex I to these Regulations, until four years after the date of entry into force 

of these Regulations. 

(c) The repositioning of lights as a result of conversion from Imperial to metric 

units and rounding off measurement figures, permanent exemption. 

(d) (i) The repositioning of masthead lights on vessels of less than 150 m in 

length, resulting from the prescriptions of Section 3(a) of annex I to these 

Regulations, permanent exemption. 

 

‡ Per 33 CFR 81.20, each vessel under the 72 COLREGS, except the vessels of the Navy, is 

exempt from the requirements of the 72 COLREGS to the limitation for the period of time 

stated in Rule 38 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g) if: (a) Her keel was laid or is at a corresponding 

stage of construction before July 15, 1977; and, (b) She meets the International Regulations 

for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1960 (77 Stat. 194, 33 U.S.C. 1051-1094). 
109

—INLAND— 

Exemptions 

SUBPART E—EXEMPTIONS 

Rule 38 

Exemptions 

§ 83.38

Any vessel or class of vessels, the keel of which was laid or which was at a 

corresponding stage of construction before December 24, 1980, provided that 

she complies with the requirements of— 

(a) The Act of June 7, 1897 (30 Stat. 96), as amended (33 U.S.C. 154-232) for 

vessels navigating the waters subject to that statute; 

(b) Section 4233 of the Revised Statutes (33 U.S.C. 301-356) for vessels 

navigating the waters subject to that statute; 

(c) The Act of February 8, 1895 (28 Stat. 645), as amended (33 U.S.C. 241-295) 

for vessels navigating the waters subject to that statute; or 

(d) Sections 3, 4, and 5 of the Act of April 25, 1940 (54 Stat. 163), as amended 

(46 U.S.C. 526b, c, and d) for motorboats navigating the waters subject to that 

statute; shall be exempted from compliance with the technical Annexes to these 

Rules (33 CFR parts 84 through 88) as follows: 

(i) The installation of lights with ranges prescribed in Rule 22 (§ 83.22), 

vessels of less than 20 meters in length are permanently exempt. 

(ii) The installation of lights with color specifications as prescribed in Annex 

I to these Rules (33 CFR part 84), vessels of less than 20 meters in length 

are permanently exempt; 

(iii) The repositioning of lights as a result of conversion to metric units and 

rounding off measurement figures are permanently exempt. 

(iv) The horizontal repositioning of masthead lights prescribed by Annex I 

to these Rules (33 CFR part 84), vessels of less than 150 meters in length 

are permanently exempted. 

(v) Power-driven vessels of 12 meters or more but less than 20 meters in 

length are permanently exempt from the provisions of Rule 23(a)(i) and (iv) 

(§ 83.23(a)(i) and (iv)) provided that, in place of these lights, the vessel 

exhibits a white light aft visible all-round the horizon. 
110

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Exemptions 

Rule 38—CONTINUED 

(d) (continued) 

(ii) The repositioning of masthead lights on vessels of 150 m or more in 

length, resulting from the prescriptions of section 3(a) of annex I to these 

Regulations, until nine years after the date of entry into force of these 

Regulations. 

(e) The repositioning of masthead lights resulting from the prescriptions of 

section 2(b) of annex I to these Regulations, until nine years after the date of 

entry into force of these Regulations. 

(f) The repositioning of sidelights resulting from the prescriptions of sections 

2(g) and 3(b) of annex I to these Regulations, until nine years after the date of 

entry into force of these Regulations. 

(g) The requirements for sound signal appliances prescribed in annex III to 

these Regulations, until nine years after the date of entry into force of these 

Regulations. 

(h) The repositioning of all-round lights resulting from the prescription of 

section 9(b) of annex I to these Regulations, permanent exemption. 
111

—INLAND— 

Exemptions 

[BLANK]
112

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I 

Positioning and Technical Details of Lights and Shapes 

1. Definition 

The term height above the hull means height above the uppermost continuous 

deck. This height shall be measured from the position vertically beneath the 

location of the light. 

2. Vertical positioning and spacing of lights 

(a) On a power-driven vessel of 20 meters or more in length the masthead 

lights shall be placed as follows: 

(i) the forward masthead light, or if only one masthead light is carried, then 

that light, at a height above the hull of not less than 6 meters, and, if the breadth 

of the vessel exceeds 6 meters, then at a height above the hull not less than such 

breadth, so however that the light need not be placed at a greater height above 

the hull than 12 meters; 

(ii) when two masthead lights are carried the after one shall be at least 4.5 

meters vertically higher than the forward one. 

(b) The vertical separation of masthead lights of power-driven vessels shall be 

such that in all normal conditions of trim the after light will be seen over and 

separate from the forward light at a distance of 1000 meters from the stem when 

viewed from sea level. 

(c) The masthead light of a power-driven vessel of 12 meters but less than 20 

meters in length shall be placed at a height above the gunwale of not less than 2.5 

meters. 

(d) A power-driven vessel of less than 12 meters in length may carry the 

uppermost light at a height of less than 2.5 meters above the gunwale. When, 

however, a masthead light is carried in addition to sidelights and a sternlight or 

the all-round light prescribed in rule 23(d)(i) is carried in addition to sidelights, 

then such masthead light or all-round light shall be carried at least 1 meter higher 

than the sidelights. 
113

—INLAND— 

Annex I 

33 CFR 84 

Positioning and Technical Details of Lights and Shapes 

§ 84.01 Definitions 

(a) The term height above the hull means height above the uppermost continuous 

deck. This height shall be measured from the position vertically beneath the 

location of the light. 

(b) High-speed craft means a craft capable of maximum speed in meters per 

second (m/s) equal to or exceeding: 3.70.1667; where  = displacement 

corresponding to the design waterline (cubic meters). 

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): The same formula expressed in pounds and knots is 

maximum speed in knots (kts) equal to exceeding 1.98(lbs) 3.70.1667; where 

=displacement corresponding to design waterline in pounds. 

(c) The term practical cut-off means, for vessels 20 meters or more in length, 12.5 

percent of the minimum luminous intensity (Table 84.15(b)) corresponding to 

the greatest range of visibility for which the requirements of Annex I (33 CFR 

part 84) are met. 

(d) The term Rule or Rules has the same meaning as in 33 CFR 83.03(r). 

§ 84.02 Vertical positioning and spacing of lights 

(a) On a power-driven vessel of 20 meters or more in length the masthead 

lights shall be placed as follows: 

(i) The forward masthead light, or if only one masthead light is carried, 

then that light, at a height above the hull of not less than 5 meters, and, if 

the breadth of the vessel exceeds 5 meters, then at a height above the hull 

not less than such breadth, so however that the light need not be placed at 

a greater height above the hull than 8 meters. 

(ii) When two masthead lights are carried the after one shall be at least 2 

meters vertically higher than the forward one. 

(b) The vertical separation of the masthead lights of power-driven vessels shall 

be such that in all normal conditions of trim the after light will be seen over and 

separate from the forward light at a distance of 1000 meters from the stem when 

viewed from water level. 

(c) The masthead light of a power-driven vessel of 12 meters but less than 20 

meters in length shall be placed at a height above the gunwale of not less than 2.5 

meters. 

(d) The masthead light, or the all-round light described in Rule 23(d)(§ 83.23(d) 

of this chapter), of a power-driven vessel of less than 12 meters in length shall be 

carried at least one meter higher than the sidelights. 
114

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

(e) One of the two or three masthead lights prescribed for a power-driven 

vessel when engaged in towing or pushing another vessel shall be placed in the 

same position as either the forward masthead light or the after masthead light; 

provided that, if carried on the aftermast, the lowest after masthead light shall be 

at least 4.5 meters vertically higher than the forward masthead light. 

(f) (i) The masthead light or lights prescribed in Rule 23(a) shall be so placed 

as to be above and clear of all other lights and obstructions except as 

described in subparagraph (ii). 

(ii) When it is impracticable to carry the all-round lights prescribed by Rule 

27(b)(i) or Rule 28 below the masthead lights, they may be carried above 

the after masthead light(s) or vertically in between the forward masthead 

light(s) and after masthead light(s), provided that in the latter case the 

requirement of Section 3(c) of this Annex shall be complied with. 

(g) The sidelights of a power-driven vessel shall be placed at a height above the 

hull not greater than three quarters of that of the forward masthead light. They 

shall not be so low as to be interfered with by deck lights. 

(h) The sidelights, if in a combined lantern and carried on a power-driven 

vessel of less than 20 meters in length, shall be placed not less than 1 meter below 

the masthead light. 

(i) When the Rules prescribe two or three lights to be carried in a vertical line, 

they shall be spaced as follows: 

(i) on a vessel of 20 meters in length or more such lights shall be spaced not 

less than 2 meters apart, and the lowest of these lights shall, except where 

a towing light is required, be placed at a height of not less than 4 meters 

above the hull; 

(ii) on a vessel of less than 20 meters in length such lights shall be spaced 

not less than 1 meter apart and the lowest of these lights shall, except where 

a towing light is required, be placed at a height of not less than 2 meters 

above the gunwale; 

(iii) when three lights are carried they shall be equally spaced. 

(j) The lower of the two all-round lights prescribed for a vessel when engaged 

in fishing shall be at a height above the sidelights not less than twice the distance 

between the two vertical lights. 

(k) The forward anchor light prescribed in Rule 30(a)(i), when two are carried, 

shall not be less than 4.5 meters above the after one. On a vessel of 50 meters or 

more in length this forward anchor light shall be placed at a height of not less 

than 6 meters above the hull. 
115

—INLAND— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

(e) One of the two or three masthead lights prescribed for a power-driven 

vessel when engaged in towing or pushing another vessel shall be placed in the 

same position as either the forward masthead light or the after masthead light, 

provided that the lowest after masthead light shall be at least 2 meters vertically 

higher than the highest forward masthead light. 

(f) (i) The masthead light or lights prescribed in Rule 23(a) (§ 83.23(a)of this 

chapter) shall be so placed as to be above and clear of all other lights and 

obstructions except as described in paragraph (f)(ii) of this section. 

(ii) When it is impracticable to carry the all-round lights prescribed in Rule 

27(b)(i) (§ 83.27(b)(i)of this chapter) below the masthead lights, they may 

be carried above the after masthead light(s) or vertically in between the 

forward masthead light(s) and after masthead light(s), provided that in the 

latter case the requirement of § 84.03(c) shall be complied with. 

(g) The sidelights of a power-driven vessel shall be placed at least one meter 

lower than the forward masthead light. They shall not be so low as to be 

interfered with by deck lights. 

(h) [Reserved] 

(i) When the Rules in this subchapter E ‡ prescribe two or three lights to be 

carried in a vertical line, they shall be spaced as follows: 

(i) On a vessel of 20 meters in length or more such lights shall be spaced 

not less than 1 meter apart, and the lowest of these lights shall, except where 

a towing light is required, be placed at a height of not less than 4 meters 

above the hull; 

(ii) On a vessel of less than 20 meters in length such lights shall be spaced 

not less than 1 meter apart and the lowest of these lights shall, except where 

a towing light is required, be placed at a height of not less than 2 meters 

above the gunwale; 

(iii) When three lights are carried they shall be equally spaced. 

(j) The lower of the two all-round lights prescribed for a vessel when engaged 

in fishing shall be at a height above the sidelights not less than twice the distance 

between the two vertical lights. 

(k) The forward anchor light prescribed in Rule 30(a)(i) (§ 83.30(a)(i)), when 

two are carried, shall not be less than 4.5 meters above the after one. On a vessel 

of 50 meters or more in length this forward anchor light shall be placed at a height 

of not less than 6 meters above the hull. 

 

‡ Parts 83-90 of Title 33 Code of Federal Regulations.
116

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

3. Horizontal positioning and spacing of lights 

(a) When two masthead lights are prescribed for a power-driven vessel, the 

horizontal distance between them shall not be less than one half of the length of 

the vessel but need not be more than 100 meters. The forward light shall be 

placed not more than one quarter of the length of the vessel from the stem. 

(b) On a power-driven vessel of 20 meters or more in length the sidelights shall 

not be placed in front of the forward masthead lights. They shall be placed at or 

near the side of the vessel. 

(c) When the lights prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) or Rule 28 are placed vertically 

between the forward masthead light(s) and the after masthead light(s) these allround lights shall be placed at a horizontal distance of not less than 2 meters from 

the fore and aft centerline of the vessel in the athwartship direction. 

(d) When only one masthead light is prescribed for a power-driven vessel, this 

light shall be exhibited forward of amidships; except that a vessel of less than 20 

meters in length need not exhibit this light forward of amidships but shall exhibit 

it as far forward as is practicable. 

4. Details of location of direction-indicating lights for fishing vessels, 

dredgers and vessels engaged in underwater operations 

(a) The light indicating the direction of the outlying gear from a vessel engaged 

in fishing as prescribed in Rule 26(c)(ii) shall be placed at a horizontal distance of 

not less than 2 meters and not more than 6 meters away from the two all-round 

red and white lights. This light shall be placed not higher than the all-round white 

light prescribed in Rule 26(c)(i) and not lower than the sidelights. 

(b) The lights and shapes on a vessel engaged in dredging or underwater 

operations to indicate the obstructed side and/or the side on which it is safe to 

pass, as prescribed in Rule 27(d)(i) and (ii), shall be placed at the maximum 

practical horizontal distance, but in no case less than 2 meters, from the lights or 

shapes prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) and (ii). In no case shall the upper of these 

lights or shapes be at a greater height than the lower of the three lights or shapes 

prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) and (ii). 
117

—INLAND— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

§ 84.03 Horizontal positioning and spacing of lights 

(a) Except as specified in paragraph (e) of this section, when two masthead 

lights are prescribed for a power-driven vessel, the horizontal distance between 

them must not be less than one quarter of the length of the vessel but need not 

be more than 50 meters. The forward light must be placed not more than one 

half of the length of the vessel from the stem. 

(b) On a power-driven vessel of 20 meters or more in length the sidelights shall 

not be placed in front of the forward masthead lights. They shall be placed at or 

near the side of the vessel. 

(c) When the lights prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) (§ 83.27(b)(i) of this chapter) are 

placed vertically between the forward masthead light(s) and the after masthead 

light(s), these all-round lights shall be placed at a horizontal distance of not less 

than 2 meters from the fore and aft centerline of the vessel in the athwartship 

direction. 

(d) When only one masthead light is prescribed for a power-driven vessel, this 

light must be exhibited forward of amidships. For a vessel of less than 20 meters 

in length, the vessel shall exhibit one masthead light as far forward as is 

practicable. 

(e) On power-driven vessels 50 meters but less than 60 meters in length 

operated on the Western Rivers, and those waters specified in § 89.25 of this 

chapter, the horizontal distance between masthead lights shall not be less than 10 

meters. 

§ 84.04 Details of location of direction-indicating lights for fishing vessels, 

dredgers and vessels engaged in underwater operations 

(a) The light indicating the direction of the outlying gear from a vessel engaged 

in fishing as prescribed in Rule 26(c)(ii) (§ 83.26(c)(ii) of this chapter) shall be 

placed at a horizontal distance of not less than 2 meters and not more than 6 

meters away from the two all-round red and white lights. This light shall be placed 

not higher than the all-round white light prescribed in Rule 26(c)(i) (§ 83.26(c)(i) 

of this chapter) and not lower than the sidelights. 

(b) The lights and shapes on a vessel engaged in dredging or underwater 

operations to indicate the obstructed side and/or the side on which it is safe to 

pass, as prescribed in Rule 27(d)(i) and (ii) (§ 83.27(d)(i) and (ii) of this chapter), 

shall be placed at the maximum practical horizontal distance, but in no case less 

than 2 meters, from the lights or shapes prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) and (i) (§ 

83.27(b)(i) and (ii) of this chapter). In no case shall the upper of these lights or 

shapes be at a greater height than the lower of the three lights or shapes 

prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) and (ii) (§ 83.27)(b)(i) and (ii) of this chapter). 
118

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

5. Screens for sidelights 

The sidelights of vessels of 20 meters or more in length shall be fitted with 

inboard screens painted matt black, and meeting the requirements of Section 9 

of this Annex. On vessels of less than 20 meters in length the sidelights, if 

necessary to meet the requirements of Section 9 of this Annex, shall be fitted with 

inboard matt black screens. With a combined lantern, using a single vertical 

filament and a very narrow division between the green and red sections, external 

screens need not be fitted. 

6. Shapes 

(a) Shapes shall be black and of the following sizes: 

(i) a ball shall have a diameter of not less than 0.6 meter; 

(ii) a cone shall have a base diameter of not less than 0.6 meter and a height 

equal to its diameter; 

(iii)a cylinder shall have a diameter of at least 0.6 meter and a height of twice 

its diameter; 

(iv)a diamond shape shall consist of two cones as defined in (ii) above 

having a common base. 

(b) The vertical distance between shapes shall be at least 1.5 meter. 

(c) In a vessel of less than 20 meters in length shapes of lesser dimensions but 

commensurate with the size of the vessel may be used and the distance apart may 

be correspondingly reduced. 

7. Color specification of lights 

The chromaticity of all navigation lights shall conform to the following 

standards, which lie within the boundaries of the area of the diagram specified 

for each color by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE). 
119

—INLAND— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

§ 84.05 Screens 

(a) The sidelights of vessels of 20 meters or more in length shall be fitted with 

matt black inboard screens and meet the requirements of § 84.15. On vessels of 

less than 20 meters in length, the sidelights, if necessary to meet the requirements 

of § 84.15, shall be fitted with matt black inboard screens. With a combined 

lantern, using a single vertical filament and a very narrow division between the 

green and red sections, external screens need not be fitted. 

(b) On power-driven vessels less than 12 meters in length constructed after 

July 31, 1983, the masthead light, or the all-round light described in Rule 23(d) (§ 

83.23(d) of this chapter) shall be screened to prevent direct illumination of the 

vessel forward of the operator’s position. 

§ 84.06 Shapes 

(a) Shapes shall be black and of the following sizes: 

(i) A ball shall have a diameter of not less than 0.6 meter. 

(ii) A cone shall have a base diameter of not less than 0.6 meters and a 

height equal to its diameter. 

(iii)A diamond shape shall consist of two cones (as defined in paragraph 

(a)(ii) of this section) having a common base. 

(b) The vertical distance between shapes shall be at least 1.5 meters. 

(c) In a vessel of less than 20 meters in length shapes of lesser dimensions but 

commensurate with the size of the vessel may be used and the distance apart may 

be correspondingly reduced. 

§ 84.13 Color specification of lights 

(a) The chromaticity of all navigation lights shall conform to the following 

standards, which lie within the boundaries of the area of the diagram specified for 

each color by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE), in the “Colors of 

Light Signals”, which is incorporated by reference. It is Publication CIE No. 2.2. (TC1.6), 1975, and is available from the Illumination Engineering Society, 345 East 47th

Street, New York, NY 10017 and is available for inspection at the Coast Guard Coast 

Guard Headquarters. Contact Commandant (CG–43), Attn: Office of Civil 

Engineering, U.S. Coast Guard Stop 7714, 2703 Martin Luther King Jr. Avenue SE., 

Washington, DC 20593–7714. It is also available for inspection at the National 

Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of 

this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: 

http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locatio

ns.html. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal 

Register.
120

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

The boundaries of the area for each color are given by indicating the corner 

coordinates, which are as follows: 

(i) White: 

x 0.525 0.525 0.452 0.310 0.310 0.443 

y 0.382 0.440 0.440 0.348 0.283 0.382 

(ii) Green: 

x 0.028 0.009 0.300 0.203 

y 0.385 0.723 0.511 0.356 

(iii)Red: 

x 0.680 0.660 0.735 0.721 

y 0.320 0.320 0.265 0.259 

(iv)Yellow: 

x 0.612 0.618 0.575 0.575 

y 0.382 0.382 0.425 0.406 

8. Intensity of lights 

(a) The minimum luminous intensity of lights shall be calculated by using the 

formula: 

I = 3.43 x 106 x T x D2 x K-D

where: 

I is luminous intensity in candelas under service conditions, 

T is threshold factor 2 x 10-7 lux, 

D is range of visibility (luminous range) of the light in nautical miles, 

K is atmospheric transmissivity. For prescribed lights the value of K shall be 0.8, 

corresponding to a meteorological visibility of approximately 13 nautical miles. 

(b) A selection of figures derived from the formula is given in the following 

table: 

Range of visibility(luminous range) of 

light in nautical miles 

Luminous intensity of light in 

candelas for K = 0.8 

D I 

1 0.9 

2 4.3 

3 12

4 27 

5 52 

6 94 

NOTE: The maximum luminous intensity of navigation lights should be limited to avoid undue glare. 

This shall not be achieved by a variable control of the luminous intensity. 
121

—INLAND— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

(b) The boundaries of the area for each color are given by indicating the corner 

co-ordinates, which are as follows: 

(i) White: 

x 0.525 0.525 0.452 0.310 0.310 0.443 

y 0.382 0.440 0.440 0.348 0.283 0.382 

(ii) Green: 

x 0.028 0.009 0.300 0.203 

y 0.385 0.723 0.511 0.356 

(iii)Red: 

x 0.680 0.660 0.735 0.721 

y 0.320 0.320 0.265 0.259 

(iv)Yellow: 

x 0.612 0.618 0.575 0.575 

y 0.382 0.382 0.425 0.406 

§ 84.14 Intensity of lights 

(a) The minimum luminous intensity of lights shall be calculated by using the 

formula: 

I = 3.43 x 106 x T x D2 x K-D

where: 

I is luminous intensity in candelas under service conditions, 

T is threshold factor 2 x 10-7 lux, 

D is range of visibility (luminous range) of the light in nautical miles, 

K is atmospheric transmissivity. For prescribed lights the value of K shall be 0.8, 

corresponding to a meteorological visibility of approximately 13 nautical miles. 

(b) A selection of figures derived from the formula is given in the following 

table (Table 84.14(b)). 

Table 84.14(b) 

Range of visibility (luminous range) of 

light in nautical miles 

Minimum luminous intensity of light in 

candelas for K = 0.8 

D I 

1 0.9 

2 4.3 

3 12

4 27 

5 52 

6 94 
122

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

9. Horizontal sectors 

(a) (i) In the forward direction, sidelights as fitted on the vessel shall show the 

minimum required intensities. The intensities shall decrease to reach 

practical cut-off between 1° and 3° outside the prescribed sectors. 

(ii) For sternlights and masthead lights and at 22.5° abaft the beam for 

sidelights, the minimum required intensities shall be maintained over the 

arc of the horizon up to 5° within the limits of the sectors prescribed in 

Rule 21. From 5° within the prescribed sectors the intensity may decrease 

by 50% up to the prescribed limits; it shall decrease steadily to reach 

practical cut-off at not more than 5° outside the prescribed sectors. 

(b) (i) All-round lights shall be so located as not to be obscured by masts, 

topmasts or structures within angular sectors of more than 6°, except 

anchor lights prescribed in Rule 30, which need not be placed at an 

impracticable height above the hull. 

(ii) If it is impracticable to comply with paragraph (b)(i) of this section by 

exhibiting only one all-round light, two all-round lights shall be used 

suitably positioned or screened so that they appear, as far as practicable, as 

one light at a distance of one mile. 

10. Vertical sectors 

(a) The vertical sectors of electric lights as fitted, with the exception of lights 

on sailing vessels underway, shall ensure that: 

(i) at least the required minimum intensity is maintained at all angles from 

5° above to 5° below the horizontal; 

(ii) at least 60% of the required minimum intensity is maintained from 7.5° 

above to 7.5° below the horizontal. 

(b) In the case of sailing vessels underway the vertical sectors of electric lights 

as fitted shall ensure that: 

(i) at least the required minimum intensity is maintained at all angles from 

5° above to 5° below the horizontal; 

(ii) at least 50% of the required minimum intensity is maintained from 25° 

above to 25° below the horizontal. 

(c) In the case of lights other than electric these specifications shall be met as 

closely as possible. 
123

—INLAND— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

§ 84.15 Horizontal sectors

(a) (i) In the forward direction, sidelights as fitted on the vessel shall show the 

minimum required intensities. The intensities shall decrease to reach 

practical cut-off between 1 and 3 degrees outside the prescribed sectors. 

(ii) For sternlights and masthead lights and at 22.5 degrees abaft the beam 

for sidelights, the minimum required intensities shall be maintained over 

the arc of the horizon up to 5 degrees within the limits of the sectors 

prescribed in Rule 21 (§ 83.21 of this chapter). From 5 degrees within the 

prescribed sectors the intensity may decrease by 50 percent up to the 

prescribed limits; it shall decrease steadily to reach practical cutoff at not 

more than 5 degrees outside the prescribed sectors. 

(b) (i) All-round lights shall be so located as not to be obscured by masts, 

topmasts or structures within angular sectors of more than 6 degrees, except 

anchor lights prescribed in Rule 30 (§ 83.30 of this chapter), which need not 

be placed at an impracticable height above the hull, and the all-round white 

light described in Rule 23(e) (§ 83.23(e) of this chapter), which may not be 

obscured at all. 

(ii) If it is impracticable to comply with paragraph (b) (i) of this section by 

exhibiting only one all-round light, two all-round lights shall be used suitably 

positioned or screened to appear, as far as practicable, as one light at a 

minimum distance of one nautical mile. 

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(ii): Two unscreened all-round lights that are 1.28 meters apart 

or less will appear as one light to the naked eye at a distance of one nautical mile. 

§ 84.16 Vertical sectors 

(a) The vertical sectors of electric lights as fitted, with the exception of lights 

on sailing vessels underway and on unmanned barges, shall ensure that: 

(i)At least the required minimum intensity is maintained at all angles from 

5 degrees above to 5 degrees below the horizontal; 

(ii) At least 60 percent of the required minimum intensity is maintained 

from 7.5 degrees above to 7.5 degrees below the horizontal. 

(b) In the case of sailing vessels underway, the vertical sectors of electric lights 

as fitted shall ensure that: 

(i) At least the required minimum intensity is maintained at all angles from 

5 degrees above to 5 degrees below the horizontal; 

(ii) At least 50 percent of the required minimum intensity is maintained 

from 25 degrees above to 25 degrees below the horizontal. 

(c) In the case of unmanned barges the minimum required intensity of electric 

lights as fitted shall be maintained on the horizontal. 

(d) In the case of lights other than electric lights these specifications shall be 

met as closely as possible.
124

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

11. Intensity of non-electric lights 

Non-electric lights shall so far as practicable comply with the minimum 

intensities, as specified in the Table given in Section 8 of this Annex. 

12. Maneuvering light 

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 2(f) of this annex, the 

maneuvering light described in Rule 34(b) shall be placed in the same fore and 

aft vertical plane as the masthead light or lights and, where practicable, at a 

minimum height of 2 meters vertically above the forward masthead light, 

provided that it shall be carried not less than 2 meters vertically above or below 

the after masthead light. On a vessel where only one masthead light is carried, the 

maneuvering light, if fitted, shall be carried where it can best be seen, not less 

than 2 meters vertically apart from the masthead light. 

13. High-speed Craft * 

(a) The masthead light of high-speed craft may be placed at a height related to 

the breadth of the craft lower than that prescribed in paragraph 2(a)(i) of this 

annex, provided that the base angle of the isosceles triangles formed by the 

sidelights and masthead light, when seen in end elevation, is not less than 27°. 

(b) On high-speed craft of 50 meters or more in length, the vertical separation 

between foremast and mainmast light of 4.5 meters required by paragraph 2(a)(ii) 

of this annex may be modified provided that such distance shall not be less than 

the value determined by the following formula: 

2

1000

( 17 )



 



a C

y

where: 

 y is the height of the mainmast light above the foremast light in meters; 

 a is the height of the foremast light above the water surface in service 

condition in meters; 

 Ψ is the trim in service conditions in degrees; 

 C is the horizontal separation of masthead lights in meters. 

* Refer to the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, 1994 and the International 

Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, 2000. 

14. Approval 

The construction of lights and shapes and the installation of lights on board 

the vessel shall be to the satisfaction of the appropriate authority of the State 

whose flag the vessel is entitled to fly. 
125

—INLAND— 

Annex I—CONTINUED 

§ 84.17 Intensity of non-electric lights 

Non-electric lights shall so far as practicable comply with the minimum 

intensities, as specified in the Table 84.14(b). 

§ 84.18 Maneuvering light 

Notwithstanding the provisions of § 84.02(f), the maneuvering light described 

in Rule 34(b) (§ 83.34(b) of this chapter) shall be placed approximately in the 

same fore and aft vertical plane as the masthead light or lights and, where 

practicable, at a minimum height of one-half meter vertically above the forward 

masthead light, provided that it shall be carried not less than one-half meter 

vertically above or below the after masthead light. On a vessel where only one 

masthead light is carried the maneuvering light, if fitted, shall be carried where it 

can best be seen, not less than one-half meter vertically apart from the masthead 

light. 

§ 84.19 High-speed Craft 

(a) The masthead light of high-speed craft may be placed at a height related to 

the breadth lower than that prescribed in § 84.02(a)(i), provided that the base 

angle of the isosceles triangle formed by the sidelights and masthead light when 

seen in end elevation is not less than 27°. 

(b) On high-speed craft of 50 meters or more in length, the vertical separation 

between foremast and mainmast light of 4.5 meters required by § 84.02(k) may 

be modified provided that such distance shall not be less than the value 

determined by the following formula: 

2

1000

( 17 )



 



a C

y ; 

where: 

 y is the height of the mainmast light above the foremast light in meters; 

 a is the height of the foremast light above the water surface in service 

condition in meters; 

 is the trim in service condition in degrees; 

 C is the horizontal separation of masthead lights in meters. 

NOTE TO § 84.19: Refer to the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, 1994 and 

the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, 2000 

§ 84.20 Approval 

The construction of lights and shapes and the installation of lights on board a 

vessel must satisfy the Commandant, U. S. Coast Guard.
126

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex II 

Additional Signals for Fishing Vessels 

Fishing in Close Proximity 

1. General 

The lights mentioned herein shall, if exhibited in pursuance of Rule 26(d), be 

placed where they can best be seen. They shall be at least 0.9 meter apart but at a 

lower level than lights prescribed in Rule 26(b)(i) and (c)(i). The lights shall be 

visible all around the horizon at a distance of at least 1 mile but at a lesser distance 

than the lights prescribed by these Rules for fishing vessels. 

2. Signals for trawlers 

(a) Vessels of 20 meters or more in length when engaged in trawling, whether 

using demersal or pelagic gear, shall exhibit: 

(i) when shooting their nets: two white lights in a vertical line; 

(ii) when hauling their nets: one white light over one red light in a vertical 

line; 

(iii) when the net has come fast upon an obstruction: two red lights in a 

vertical line. 

(b) Each vessel of 20 meters or more in length engaged in pair trawling shall 

exhibit: 

(i) by night, a searchlight directed forward and in the direction of the other 

vessel of the pair; 

(ii) when shooting or hauling their nets or when their nets have come fast 

upon an obstruction, the lights prescribed in 2(a) above. 

(c) A vessel of less than 20 meters in length engaged in trawling, whether using 

demersal or pelagic gear, or engaged in pair trawling, may exhibit the lights 

prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section, as appropriate. 

3. Signals for purse seiners 

Vessels engaged in fishing with purse seine gear may exhibit two yellow lights 

in a vertical line. These lights shall flash alternately every second and with equal 

light and occultation duration. These lights may be exhibited only when the vessel 

is hampered by its fishing gear. 
127

—INLAND— 

Annex II 

33 CFR 85 

§ 85.01. [Reserved] 

 
128

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex III 

Technical Details of Sound Signal Appliances 

1. Whistles 

(a) Frequencies and range of audibility 

The fundamental frequency of the signal shall lie within the range 70-700 Hz. 

The range of audibility of the signal from a whistle shall be determined by those 

frequencies, which may include the fundamental and/or one or more higher 

frequencies, which lie within the range 180-700 Hz (+/- 1%) for a vessel of 20 

meters or more in length, or 180-2100 Hz (+/- 1%) for a vessel of less than 20 

meters in length and which provide the sound pressure levels specified in 

paragraph 1(c) below. 

(b) Limits of fundamental frequencies 

To ensure a wide variety of whistle characteristics, the fundamental frequency 

of a whistle shall be between the following limits: 

(i) 70-200 Hz, for a vessel 200 meters or more in length; 

(ii) 130-350 Hz, for a vessel 75 meters but less than 200 meters in length; 

(iii) 250-700 Hz, for a vessel less than 75 meters in length. 

(c) Sound signal intensity and range of audibility 

A whistle fitted in a vessel shall provide, in the direction of maximum intensity 

of the whistle and at a distance of 1 meter from it, a sound pressure level in at 

least one 1/3-octave band within the range of frequencies 180-700 Hz (+/- 1%) 

for a vessel of 20 meters or more in length, or 180-2100 Hz (+/- 1%) for a vessel 

of less than 20 meters in length, of not less than the appropriate figure given in 

the table below. 

The range of audibility in the table above is for information and is 

approximately the range at which a whistle may be heard on its forward axis with 

90 percent probability in conditions of still air on board a vessel having average 

background noise level at the listening posts (taken to be 68 dB in the octave 

band centered on 250 Hz and 63 dB in the octave band centered on 500 Hz). 
129

—INLAND— 

Annex III 

33 CFR 86 

Technical Details of Sound Signal Appliances 

§ 86.01 Whistles. 

(a) Frequencies and range of audibility. The fundamental frequency of the signal 

shall lie within the range 70-700 Hz. The range of audibility of the signal from a 

whistle shall be determined by those frequencies, which may include the 

fundamental and/or one or more higher frequencies, which lie within the range 

180-700 Hz (+/- 1%) for a vessel of 20 meters or more in length, or 180-2100 

Hz (+/- 1%) for a vessel of less than 20 meters in length and which provide the 

sound pressure levels specified in paragraph (c) of this section. 

(b) Limits of fundamental frequencies. To ensure a wide variety of whistle 

characteristics, the fundamental frequency of a whistle shall be between the 

following limits: 

(i) 70-200 Hz, for a vessel 200 meters or more in length. 

(ii) 130-350 Hz, for a vessel 75 meters but less than 200 meters in length. 

(iii) 250-700 Hz, for a vessel less than 75 meters in length. 

(c) Sound signal intensity and range of audibility. 

A whistle fitted in a vessel shall provide, in the direction of maximum intensity 

of the whistle and at a distance of 1 meter from it, a sound pressure level in at 

least one 1/3 rd-octave band within the range of frequencies 180-700 Hz (+/- 1%) 

for a vessel of 20 meters or more in length, or 180-2100 Hz (+/-1%) for a vessel 

of less than 20 meters in length, of not less than the appropriate figure given in 

Table 86.01(c) of this section. The range of audibility in Table 86.01(c) is the 

approximate range at which a whistle may be heard on its forward axis with 90% 

probability in conditions of still air on board a vessel having average background 

noise level at the listening posts (taken to be 68 dB in the octave band centered 

on 250 Hz and 63 dB in the octave band centered on 500 Hz). It is shown for 

informational purposes only. In practice, the range at which a whistle may be 

heard is extremely variable and depends critically on weather conditions; the 

values given can be regarded as typical but under conditions of strong wind or 

high ambient noise level at the listening post the range may be reduced. 
130

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex III—CONTINUED 

Length of vessel 

in meters 

1/3-octave band 

level at 

1 meter in dB 

referred to 2x10-5

N/m2

Audibility range 

in nautical miles

200 or more 143 2 

75 but less than 200 138 1.5 

20 but less than 75 130 1 

Less than 20

120 *

115 †

111 ‡

0.5

*

 When the measured frequencies lie within the range 180-450 Hz 

†

 When the measured frequencies lie within the range 450-800 Hz 

‡

 When the measured frequencies lie within the range 800-2100 Hz 

In practice the range at which a whistle may be heard is extremely variable and depends 

critically on weather conditions; the values given can be regarded as typical but under 

conditions of strong wind or high ambient noise level at the listening post the range may 

be much reduced. 

(d) Directional properties 

The sound pressure level of a directional whistle shall be not more than 4 dB 

below the prescribed sound pressure level on the axis at any direction in the 

horizontal plane within ± 45 degrees of the axis. The sound pressure level at any 

other direction in the horizontal plane shall be not more than 10 dB below the 

prescribed sound pressure level on the axis, so that the range in any direction will 

be at least half the range on the forward axis. The sound pressure level shall be 

measured in that one-third octave band which determines the audibility range. 

(e) Positioning of whistles

When a directional whistle is to be used as the only whistle on a vessel, it shall 

be installed with its maximum intensity directed straight ahead. 

A whistle shall be placed as high as practicable on a vessel, in order to reduce 

interception of the emitted sound by obstructions and also to minimize hearing 

damage risk to personnel. The sound pressure level of the vessel’s own signal at 

listening posts shall not exceed 110 dB(A) and so far as practicable should not 

exceed 100 dB(A). 

(f) Fitting of more than one whistle 

If whistles are fitted at a distance apart of more than 100 meters, it shall be so 

arranged that they are not sounded simultaneously.
131

—INLAND— 

Annex III—CONTINUED 

Table 86.01(c) 

Length of vessel in meters 

1/3rd-octave band 

level at 

1 meter in dB 

referred to 

2x10-5 N/m2

Audibility range 

in nautical miles

200 or more 143 2 

75 but less than 200 138 1.5 

20 but less than 75 130 1 

Less than 20

1120

2115

3111

0.5

1

 When the measured frequencies lie within the range 180-450 Hz. 

2

 When the measured frequencies lie within the range 450-800 Hz. 

3

 When the measured frequencies lie within the range 800-2100 Hz. 

(d) Directional properties. The sound pressure level of a directional whistle shall 

be not more than 4 dB below the sound pressure level specified in paragraph (c) 

of this section, in any direction in the horizontal plane within ±45 degrees of the 

forward axis. The sound pressure level of the whistle in any other direction in the 

horizontal plane shall not be more than 10 dB less than the sound pressure level 

specified for the forward axis, so that the range of audibility in any direction will 

be at least half the range required on the forward axis. The sound pressure level 

shall be measured in that one 1/3

rd-octave band which determines the audibility 

range. 

(e) Positioning of whistles

(i) When a directional whistle is to be used as the only whistle on the vessel 

and is permanently installed, it shall be installed with its forward axis 

directed forward. 

(ii) A whistle shall be placed as high as practicable on a vessel, in order to 

reduce interception of the emitted sound by obstructions and also to 

minimize hearing damage risk to personnel. The sound pressure level of the 

vessel’s own signal at listening posts shall not exceed 110 dB(A) and so far 

as practicable should not exceed 100 dB(A). 

(f) Fitting of more than one whistle. If whistles are fitted at a distance apart of 

more than 100 meters, they shall not be sounded simultaneously.
132

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex III—CONTINUED 

(g) Combined whistle systems 

If due to the presence of obstructions the sound field of a single whistle or of 

one of the whistles referred to in paragraph 1(f) above is likely to have a zone of 

greatly reduced signal level, it is recommended that a combined whistle system 

be fitted so as to overcome this reduction. For the purposes of the Rules a 

combined whistle system is to be regarded as a single whistle. The whistles of a 

combined system shall be located at a distance apart of not more than 100 meters 

and arranged to be sounded simultaneously. The frequency of any one whistle 

shall differ from those of the others by at least 10 Hz. 

2. Bell or gong 

(a) Intensity of signal 

A bell or gong, or other device having similar sound characteristics shall 

produce a sound pressure level of not less than 110 dB at a distance of 1 meter 

from it. 

(b) Construction 

Bells and gongs shall be made of corrosion-resistant material and designed to 

give a clear tone. The diameter of the mouth of the bell shall be not less than 300 

mm for vessels of 20 meters or more in length. Where practicable, a power-driven 

bell striker is recommended to ensure constant force but manual operation shall 

be possible. The mass of the striker shall be not less than 3 percent of the mass 

of the bell. 

3. Approval 

The construction of sound signal appliances, their performance and their 

installation on board the vessel shall be to the satisfaction of the appropriate 

authority of the State whose flag the vessel is entitled to fly. 
133

—INLAND— 

Annex III—CONTINUED 

(g)Combined whistle systems

(i) A combined whistle system is a number of whistles (sound emitting 

sources) operated together. For the purposes of the Rules in Subchapter E ‡

a combined whistle system is to be regarded as a single whistle. 

(ii) The whistles of a combined system shall: 

(1) Be located at a distance apart of not more than 100 meters; 

(2) Be sounded simultaneously; 

(3) Each have a fundamental frequency different from those of the others 

by at least 10 Hz; and 

(4) Have a tonal characteristic appropriate for the length of vessel which 

shall be evidenced by at least two-thirds of the whistles in the combined 

system having fundamental frequencies falling within the limits prescribed 

in paragraph (b) of this section, or if there are only two whistles in the 

combined system, by the higher fundamental frequency falling within the 

limits prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section. 

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g): If, due to the presence of obstructions, the sound field of a 

single whistle or of one of the whistles referred to in paragraph (f) of this section is likely 

to have a zone of greatly reduced signal level, a combined whistle system should be fitted 

so as to overcome this reduction.

(h)Towing vessel whistles. A power-driven vessel normally engaged in pushing 

ahead or towing alongside may, at all times, use a whistle whose characteristic 

falls within the limits prescribed by paragraph (b) of this section for the longest 

customary composite length of the vessel and its tow. 

§86.02 Bell or gong 

(a) Intensity of signal. A bell or gong, or other device having similar sound 

characteristics shall produce a sound pressure level of not less than 110 dB at 1 

meter. 

(b) Construction. Bells and gongs shall be made of corrosion-resistant material 

and designed to give clear tone. The diameter of the mouth of the bell shall be 

not less than 300 mm for vessels of 20 meters or more in length. Where 

practicable, a power-driven bell striker is recommended to ensure constant force 

but manual operation shall be possible. The mass of the striker shall be not less 

than 3 percent of the mass of the bell. 

§ 86.03 Approval. [Reserved]

 

‡

 Parts 83-90 of Title 33 Code of Federal Regulations. 
134

—INTERNATIONAL— 

Annex IV 

Distress Signals 

1. The following signals, used or exhibited either together or separately, indicate 

distress and need of assistance: 

(a) a gun or other explosive signal fired at intervals of about a minute; 

(b) a continuous sounding with any fog-signaling apparatus; 

(c) rockets or shells, throwing red stars fired one at a time at short intervals; 

(d) a signal made by any signaling method consisting of the group. . . – – – . . . 

(SOS) in the Morse Code; 

(e) a signal sent by radiotelephony consisting of the spoken word “Mayday”; 

(f) the International Code Signal of distress indicated by N.C.; 

(g) a signal consisting of a square flag having above or below it a ball or anything 

resembling a ball; 

(h) flames on the vessel (as from a burning tar barrel, oil barrel, etc.); 

(i) a rocket parachute flare or a hand flare showing a red light; 

(j) a smoke signal giving off orange-colored smoke; 

(k) slowly and repeatedly raising and lowering arms outstretched to each side; 

(l) a distress alert by means of digital selective calling (DSC) transmitted on: 

(i) VHF channel 70, or 

(ii) MF/HF on the frequencies 2187.5 kHz ‡, 8414.5 kHz, 4207.5 kHz, 6312 

kHz, 12577 kHz or 16804.5 kHz; 

(m) a ship-to-shore distress alert transmitted by the ship’s Inmarsat or other 

mobile satellite service provider ship earth station; 

(n) signals transmitted by emergency position-indicating radio beacons; 

(o) approved signals transmitted by radiocommunication systems, including 

survival craft radar transponders. 

2. The use or exhibition of any of the foregoing signals except for the purpose of 

indicating distress and need of assistance and the use of other signals which may be 

confused with any of the above signals is prohibited. 

3. Attention is drawn to the relevant sections of the International Code of Signals, 

the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, Volume III, 

and the following signals: 

(a) a piece of orange-colored canvas with either a black square and circle or other 

appropriate symbol (for identification from the air); 

(b) a dye marker. 

 

‡ The U.S. Coast Guard terminated monitoring DSC safety and distress frequency 2187.5 kHz on 

August 1, 2013. (78 FR 42102).
135

—INLAND— 

Annex IV 

33 CFR 87 

Distress Signals 

§ 87.1 Need of assistance 

The following signals, used or exhibited either together or separately, indicate distress 

and need of assistance: 

(a) A gun or other explosive signal fired at intervals of about a minute; 

(b) A continuous sounding with any fog-signaling apparatus; 

(c) Rockets or shells, throwing red stars fired one at a time at short intervals; 

(d) A signal made by any method consisting of the group . . . – – – . . . (SOS) in 

the Morse Code; 

(e) A signal sent by radiotelephony consisting of the spoken word “Mayday”; 

(f) The International Code Signal of distress indicated by N.C.; 

(g) A signal consisting of a square flag having above or below it a ball or anything 

resembling a ball; 

(h) Flames on the vessel (as from a burning tar barrel, oil barrel, etc.); 

(i) A rocket parachute flare or a hand flare showing a red light; 

(j) A smoke signal giving off orange-colored smoke; 

(k) Slowly and repeatedly raising and lowering arms outstretched to each side; 

(l) A distress alert by means of digital selective calling (DSC) transmitted on: 

(i) VHF channel 70, or 

(ii) MF/HF on the frequencies 2187.5 kHz ‡, 8414.5 kHz, 4207.5 kHz, 

6312 kHz, 12577 kHz or 16804.5 kHz; 

(m) A ship-to-shore distress alert transmitted by the ship’s Inmarsat or other 

mobile satellite service provider ship earth station; 

(n) Signals transmitted by emergency position-indicating radio beacons; 

(o) Signals transmitted by radiocommunication systems, including survival craft 

radar transponders meeting the requirements of 47 CFR 80.109; and 

(p) A high intensity white light flashing at regular intervals from 50 to 70 times per 

minute. 

§ 87.02 Exclusive use. The use or exhibition of any of the foregoing signals except 

for the purpose of indicating distress and need of assistance and the use of other 

signals which may be confused with any of the above signals is prohibited. 

§ 87.03 Supplemental signals. Attention is drawn to the relevant sections of the 

International Code of Signals, the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search 

and Rescue Manual, Volume III, the International Telecommunication Union Radio 

Regulations, and the following signals: 

(a) A piece of orange-colored canvas with either a black square and circle or other 

appropriate symbol (for identification from the air); 

(b) A dye marker. 

 

‡ The U.S. Coast Guard terminated monitoring DSC safety and distress frequency 2187.5 kHz on 

August 1, 2013. (78 FR 42102).
136

—INTERNATIONAL— 

[BLANK] 
137

—INLAND— 

Annex V 

33 CFR 88 

Pilot Rules 

§ 88.01 Purpose and applicability 

This Part applies to all vessels operating on United States inland waters and to 

United States vessels operating on the Canadian waters of the Great Lakes to the 

extent there is no conflict with Canadian law. 

§ 88.03 Definitions 

The terms used in this part have the same meaning as the terms defined in Part 

83 of this subchapter. 

§ 88.05 Law enforcement vessels 

(a) Law enforcement vessels may display a flashing blue light when engaged in 

direct law enforcement or public safety activities. This light must be located so 

that it does not interfere with the visibility of the vessel’s navigation lights. 

(b) The blue light described in this section may be displayed by law 

enforcement vessels of the United States and the States and their political 

subdivisions. 

§ 88.07 Public Safety Activities 

(a) Vessels engaged in government sanctioned public safety activities, and 

commercial vessels performing similar functions, may display an alternately 

flashing red and yellow light signal. This identification light signal must be located 

so that it does not interfere with the visibility of the vessel’s navigation lights. The 

identification light signal may be used only as an identification signal and conveys 

no special privilege. Vessels using the identification light signal during public 

safety activities must abide by the Inland Navigation Rules, and must not presume 

that the light or the exigency gives them precedence or right of way. 

(b) Public safety activities include but are not limited to patrolling marine 

parades, regattas, or special water celebrations; traffic control; salvage; 

firefighting; medical assistance; assisting disabled vessels; and search and rescue. 
138

—INTERNATIONAL— 

INTERPRETATIVE RULES 

33 CFR 82 

§ 82.1 Purpose 

This part contains the interpretative rules concerning the 72 COLREGS that 

are adopted by the Coast Guard for the guidance of the public. 

§ 82.3 Pushing vessel and vessel being pushed: Composite unit 

Rule 24(b) of the 72 COLREGS states that when a pushing vessel and a vessel 

being pushed ahead are rigidly connected in a composite unit, they are regarded 

as a power-driven vessel and must exhibit the lights under Rule 23. A “composite 

unit” is interpreted to be a pushing vessel that is rigidly connected by mechanical 

means to a vessel being pushed so they react to sea and swell as one vessel. 

“Mechanical means” does not include the following: 

(a) Lines. 

(b) Hawsers. 

(c) Wires. 

(d) Chains. 

§ 82.5 Lights for moored vessels 

For the purposes of Rule 30 of the 72 COLREGS, a vessel at anchor includes a 

barge made fast to one or more mooring buoys or other similar device attached 

to the sea or river floor. Such a barge may be lighted as a vessel at anchor in 

accordance with Rule 30, or may be lighted on the corners in accordance with 33 

CFR 83.30(h) through (l). 

§ 82.7 Sidelights for unmanned barges 

An unmanned barge being towed may use the exception of COLREGS Rule 

24(h). However, this exception only applies to the vertical sector requirements. 
139

—INLAND— 

INTERPRETATIVE RULES 

33 CFR 90 

§ 90.1 Purpose 

This part contains the interpretative rules for the Inland Rules. These 

interpretative rules are intended as a guide to assist the public and promote 

compliance with the Inland Rules. 

§ 90.3 Pushing vessel and vessel being pushed: Composite unit 

Rule 24(b) of the Inland Rules states that when a pushing vessel and a vessel 

being pushed ahead are rigidly connected in a composite unit, they are regarded 

as a power-driven vessel and must exhibit the lights prescribed in Rule 23. A 

“composite unit” is interpreted to be the combination of a pushing vessel and a 

vessel being pushed ahead that are rigidly connected by mechanical means so they 

react to sea and swell as one vessel. Mechanical means does not include lines, 

wires, hawsers, or chains. 

§ 90.5 Lights for moored vessels 

A vessel at anchor includes a vessel made fast to one or more mooring buoys 

or other similar device attached to the ocean floor. Such vessels may be lighted 

as a vessel at anchor in accordance with Rule 30, or may be lighted on the corners 

in accordance with 33 CFR 83.30(h) through (l). 

§ 90.7 Sidelights for unmanned barges 

An unmanned barge being towed may use the exception of COLREGS Rule 

24(h). However, this exception only applies to the vertical sector requirements. 
140

—INTERNATIONAL— 

PENALTY PROVISIONS 

33 U.S.C. 1608 

(a) Liability of vessel operator for violations 

Whoever operates a vessel, subject to the provisions of this Chapter, in 

violation of this chapter or of any regulation promulgated pursuant to section 

1607 of this title, shall be liable to a civil penalty of not more than $5,000 for each 

such violation. 

(b) Liability of vessel for violations; seizure of vessel 

Every vessel subject to the provisions of this chapter, other than a public vessel 

being used for noncommercial purposes, which is operated in violation of this 

chapter or of any regulation promulgated pursuant to section 1607 of this title, 

shall be liable to a civil penalty of not more than $5,000 for each such violation, 

for which penalty the vessel may be seized and proceeded against in the district 

court of the United States of any district within which such vessel may be found. 

(c) Assessment of penalties; notice; opportunity for hearing; remission, 

mitigation, and compromise of penalty; action for collection 

The Secretary of the department in which the Coast Guard is operating may 

assess any civil penalty authorized by this section. No such penalty may be 

assessed until the person charged, or the owner of the vessel charged, as 

appropriate, shall have been given notice of the violation involved and an 

opportunity for a hearing. For good cause shown, the Secretary may remit, 

mitigate, or compromise any penalty assessed. Upon the failure of the person 

charged, or the owner of the vessel charged, to pay an assessed penalty, as it may 

have been mitigated or compromised, the Secretary may request the Attorney 

General to commence an action in the appropriate district court of the United 

States for collection of the penalty as assessed, without regard to the amount 

involved, together with such other relief as may be appropriate. 

 
141

—INLAND— 

PENALTY PROVISIONS 

33 U.S.C. 2072 

(a) Liability of operator for civil penalty

Whoever operates a vessel in violation of this chapter, or of any regulation 

issued thereunder, or in violation of a certificate of alternative compliance issued 

under Rule 1 is liable to a civil penalty of not more than $5,000 for each violation. 

(b) Liability of vessel for civil penalty; seizure of vessel

Every vessel subject to this chapter, other than a public vessel being used for 

noncommercial purposes, that is operated in violation of this chapter, or of any 

regulation issued thereunder, or in violation of a certificate of alternative 

compliance issued under Rule 1 is liable to a civil penalty of not more than $5,000 

for each violation, for which penalty the vessel may be seized and proceeded 

against in the district court of the United States of any district within which the 

vessel may be found. 

(c) Assessment of civil penalty by Secretary; collection

The Secretary may assess any civil penalty authorized by this section. No such 

penalty may be assessed until the person charged, or the owner of the vessel 

charged, as appropriate, shall have been given notice of the violation involved 

and an opportunity for a hearing. For good cause shown, the Secretary may remit, 

mitigate, or compromise any penalty assessed. Upon the failure of the person 

charged, or the owner of the vessel charged, to pay an assessed penalty, as it may 

have been mitigated or compromised, the Secretary may request the Attorney 

General to commence an action in the appropriate district court of the United 

States for collection of the penalty as assessed, without regard to the amount 

involved, together with such other relief as may be appropriate. 

(d) Withholding of clearance 

(1) If any owner, operator, or individual in charge of a vessel is liable for a 

penalty under this section, or if reasonable cause exists to believe that the 

owner, operator, or individual in charge may be subject to a penalty under 

this section, the Secretary of the Treasury, upon the request of the Secretary, 

shall with respect to such vessel refuse or revoke any clearance required by 

section 60105 of Title 46. 

(2) Clearance or a permit refused or revoked under this subsection may be 

granted upon filing of a bond or other surety satisfactory to the Secretary. 

 
142

IMPLEMENTING RULES 

CERTIFICATE of ALTERNATIVE COMPLIANCE 

33 CFR 81, 89 

The alternative compliance procedures for the International and the Inland Rules 

are the same, although they appear in two distinct parts of the Code of Federal 

Regulations (33 CFR parts 81 and 89).

Sec. 

1. Definitions. 

2. General. 

3. Application for a Certificate of Alternative Compliance. 

4. Certificate of Alternative Compliance: Contents. 

5. Certificate of Alternative Compliance: Termination. 

6. Record of certification of vessels of special construction or purpose. 

§ 81.1|§ 89.1 Definitions. 

As used in this part: 

72 COLREGS refers to the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions 

at Sea, 1972, done at London, October 20, 1972, as rectified by the Proces-Verbal 

of December 1, 1973, as amended. 

Inland Rules refers to the Inland Navigation Rules contained in the Inland 

Navigational Rules Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-591) and the technical annexes 

established under that Act. 

A vessel of special construction or purpose means a vessel designed or modified to 

perform a special function and whose arrangement is thereby made relatively 

inflexible. 

Interference with the special function of the vessel occurs when installation or use of 

lights, shapes, or sound-signaling appliances under the 72 COLREGS/Inland 

Rules prevents or significantly hinders the operation in which the vessel is usually 

engaged. 

§ 81.3|§ 89.3 General. 

Vessels of special construction or purpose which cannot fully comply with the 

light, shape, and sound signal provisions of the 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules 

without interfering with their special function may instead meet alternative 

requirements. The Chief of the Marine Safety Division in each Coast Guard 

District Office makes this determination and requires that alternative compliance 

be as close as possible with the 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules. These regulations 

set out the procedure by which a vessel may be certified for alternative 

compliance. The information collection and recordkeeping requirements in §§ 

81.5, 81.18, 89.5 and 89.19 have been approved by the Office of Management 

and Budget under OMB control No. 1625-0019. 

 
143

ALTERNATIVE COMPLIANCE−CONTINUED 

§ 81.5|§ 89.5 Application for a Certificate of Alternative Compliance. 

(a) The owner, builder, operator, or agent of a vessel of special construction or 

purpose who believes the vessel cannot fully comply with the 72 

COLREGS/Inland Rules light, shape, or sound signal provisions without 

interference with its special function may apply for a determination that 

alternative compliance is justified. The application must be in writing, submitted 

to the Chief of the Marine Safety Division of the Coast Guard District in which 

the vessel is being built or operated, and include the following information: 

(1) The name, address, and telephone number of the applicant. 

(2) The identification of the vessel by its: 

(i) Official number; 

(ii) Shipyard hull number; 

(iii) Hull identification number; or 

(iv) State number, if the vessel does not have an official number or hull 

identification number. 

(3) Vessel name and home port, if known. 

(4) A description of the vessel’s area of operation. 

(5) A description of the provision for which the Certificate of Alternative 

Compliance is sought, including: 

(i) The 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules Rule or Annex section number for 

which the Certificate of Alternative Compliance is sought; 

(ii) A description of the special function of the vessel that would be 

interfered with by full compliance with the provision of that Rule or 

Annex section; and 

(iii) A statement of how full compliance would interfere with the special 

function of the vessel. 

(6) A description of the alternative installation that is in closest possible 

compliance with the applicable 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules Rule or Annex 

section. 

(7) A copy of the vessel’s plans or an accurate scale drawing that clearly 

shows: 

(i) The required installation of the equipment under the 

72 COLREGS/Inland Rules, 

(ii) The proposed installation of the equipment for which certification 

is being sought, and 

(iii) Any obstructions that may interfere with the equipment when 

installed in: 

(A) The required location; and 

(B) The proposed location. 

(b) The Coast Guard may request from the applicant additional information 

concerning the application. 

 
144

ALTERNATIVE COMPLIANCE−CONTINUED 

§ 81.9|§ 89.9 Certificate of Alternative Compliance: Contents. 

The Chief of the Marine Safety Division issues the Certificate of Alternative 

Compliance to the vessel based on a determination that it cannot comply fully 

with 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules light, shape, and sound signal provisions 

without interference with its special function. This Certificate includes: 

(a) Identification of the vessel as supplied in the application under § 91.5(a)(2) 

or 89.5(a)(2); 

(b) The provision of the 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules for which the Certificate 

authorizes alternative compliance; 

(c) A certification that the vessel is unable to comply fully with the 72 

COLREGS/Inland Rules light, shape, and sound signal requirements without 

interference with its special function; 

(d) A statement of why full compliance would interfere with the special 

function of the vessel; 

(e) The required alternative installation; 

(f) A statement that the required alternative installation is in the closest possible 

compliance with the 72 COLREGS/Inland Rules without interfering with the 

special function of the vessel; 

(g) The date of issuance; 

(h) A statement that the Certificate of Alternative Compliance terminates when 

the vessel ceases to be usually engaged in the operation for which the certificate 

is issued. 

§ 81.17|§ 89.17 Certificate of Alterative Compliance: Termination. 

The Certificate of Alternative Compliance terminates if the information 

supplied under § 81.5(a)/§ 89.5(a) or the Certificate issued under § 81.9/§ 89.9 is 

no longer applicable to the vessel. 

§ 81.18|§ 89.18 [Notice and] Record of Certification of Vessels of Special 

Construction or Purpose. [Squared bracketed text COLREGS Only] 

[(a) In accordance with 33 U.S.C. 1605(c), a notice is published in the FEDERAL 

REGISTER if the following: 

(1) Each Certificate of Alternative Compliance issued under § 81.9; and 

(2) Each Coast Guard vessel determined by the Commandant to be a 

vessel of special construction or purpose.] 

(b|a) Copies of Certificates of Alternative Compliance and documentation 

concerning Coast Guard vessels are available for inspection at the offices of the 

Marine Transportation Systems Directorate, U.S. Coast Guard Headquarters 

(CG–5PW), Stop 7509, 2703 Martin Luther King Jr. Avenue SE., Washington, 

DC 20593–7509. 

(c|b) The owner or operator of a vessel issued a certificate shall ensure that the 

vessel does not operate unless the Certificate of Alternative Compliance or a 

certified copy of that certificate is on board the vessel and available for inspection 

by Coast Guard personnel. 

 
145

IMPLEMENTING RULES 

WATERS UPON WHICH CERTAIN 

RULES APPLY 

33 CFR 89 

§ 89.21 Purpose. 

Inland Navigation Rules 9(a)(ii), 14(d), and 15(b) apply to the Great Lakes, and 

along with 24(i), apply on the “Western Rivers” as defined in Rule 3(1), and to 

additional specifically designated waters. The purpose of this Subpart is to specify 

those additional waters upon which Inland Navigation Rules 9(a)(ii), 14(d), 15(b), 

and 24(j) apply. 

§ 89.25 Waters upon which Inland Rules 9(a)(ii), 14(d), and 15(b) apply. 

Inland Rules 9(a)(ii), 14(d), and 15(b) apply on the Great Lakes, the Western 

Rivers, and the following specified waters: 

(a) Tennessee-Tombigbee Waterway. 

(b) Tombigbee River. 

(c) Black Warrior River. 

(d) Alabama River. 

(e) Coosa River. 

(f) Mobile River above the Cochrane Bridge at St. 

Louis Point. 

(g) Flint River. 

(h) Chattahoochee River. 

(i) The Apalachicola River above its confluence with 

the Jackson River. 

§ 89.27 Waters upon which Inland Rule 24(j) applies. 

(a) Inland Rule 24(j) applies on the Western Rivers and the specified waters 

listed in § 89.25 (a) through (i). 

(b) Inland Rule 24(j) applies on the Gulf Intracoastal Waterway from St. Marks, 

Florida, to the Rio Grande, Texas, including the Morgan City-Port Allen 

Alternate Route and the Galveston-Freeport Cutoff, except that a power-driven 

vessel pushing ahead or towing alongside shall exhibit the lights required by 

Inland Rule 24(c), while transiting within the following areas: 

(1) St. Andrews Bay from the Hathaway Fixed Bridge at Mile 284.6 East of Harvey Locks (EHL) to 

the Dupont Fixed Bridge at Mile 295.4 EHL. 

(2) Pensacola Bay, Santa Rosa Sound and Big Lagoon from the Light “10” off of Trout Point at Mile 

176.9 EHL to the Pensacola Fixed Bridge at Mile 189.1 EHL. 

(3) Mobile Bay and Bon Secour Bay from the Dauphin Island Causeway Fixed Bridge at Mile 127.7 

EHL to Little Point Clear at Mile 140 EHL. 

(4) Mississippi Sound from Grand Island Waterway Light “1” at Mile 53.8 EHL to Light “40” off the 

West Point of Dauphin Island at Mile 118.7 EHL. 

(5) The Mississippi River at New Orleans, Mississippi River-Gulf Outlet Canal and the Inner Harbor 

Navigation Canal from the junction of the Harvey Canal and the Algiers Alternate Route at Mile 6.5 West 

of Harvey Locks (WHL) to the Michoud Canal at Mile 18 EHL. 

(6) The Calcasieu River from the Calcasieu Lock at Mile 238.6 WHL to the Ellender Lift Bridge at 

Mile 243.6 WHL. 

(7) The Sabine Neches Canal from Mile 262.5 WHL to Mile 291.5 WHL. 

(8) Bolivar Roads from the Bolivar Assembling Basin at Mile 346 WHL to the Galveston Causeway 

Bridge at Mile 357.3 WHL. 

(9) Freeport Harbor from Surfside Beach Fixed Bridge at Mile 393.8 WHL to the Bryan Beach 

Pontoon Bridge at Mile 397.6 WHL. 

(10) Matagorda Ship Channel area of Matagorda Bay from Range “K” Front Light at Mile 468.7 WHL 

to the Port O’Connor Jetty at Mile 472.2 WHL. 

(11) Corpus Christi Bay from Redfish Bay Day Beacon “55” at Mile 537.4 WHL when in the Gulf 

Intracoastal Waterway main route or from the north end of Lydia Ann Island Mile 531.1A when in the Gulf 

Intracoastal Waterway Alternate Route to Corpus Christi Bay LT 76 at Mile 543.7 WHL. 

(12) Port Isabel and Brownsville Ship Channel south of the Padre Island Causeway Fixed Bridge at Mile 

665.1 WHL. 
146

COLREGS DEMARCATION LINES 

33 CFR 80

GENERAL 

Sec. 

80.01 General basis and purpose of demarcation 

lines. 

ATLANTIC COAST 

FIRST DISTRICT 

80.105 Calais, ME to Cape Small, ME. 

80.110 Casco Bay, ME. 

80.115 Portland Head, ME to Cape Ann, MA. 

80.120 Cape Ann, MA to Marblehead Neck, MA. 

80.125 Marblehead Neck, MA to Nahant, MA. 

80.130 Boston Harbor entrance. 

80.135 Hull, MA to Race Point, MA. 

80.145 Race Point, MA to Watch Hill, RI. 

80.150 Block Island, RI. 

80.155 Watch Hill, RI to Montauk Point, NY. 

80.160 Montauk Point, NY to Atlantic Beach, NY. 

80.165 New York Harbor. 

80.170 Sandy Hook, NJ to Tom’s River, NJ. 

FIFTH DISTRICT 

80.501 Tom’s River, NJ to Cape May, NJ. 

80.503 Delaware Bay. 

80.505 Cape Henlopen, DE to Cape Charles, VA. 

80.510 Chesapeake Bay Entrance, VA. 

80.515 Cape Henry, VA to Cape Hatteras, NC. 

80,520 Cape Hatteras, NC to Cape Lookout, NC. 

80.525 Cape Lookout, NC to Cape Fear, NC. 

80.530 Cape Fear, NC to New River Inlet, NC. 

SEVENTH DISTRICT 

80.703 Little River Inlet, SC to Cape Romain, SC. 

80.707 Cape Romain, SC to Sullivans Island, SC. 

80.710 Charleston Harbor, SC. 

80.712 Morris Island, SC to Hilton Head Island, 

SC. 

80.715 Savannah River. 

80.717 Tybee Island, GA to St. Simons Island, 

GA. 

80.720 St. Simons Island, GA to Amelia Island, 

FL. 

80.723 Amelia Island, FL to Cape Canaveral, FL. 

80.727 Cape Canaveral, FL to Miami Beach, FL. 

80.730 Miami Harbor, FL. 

80.735 Miami, FL to Long Key, FL. 

CARIBBEAN ISLANDS 

80.738 Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands. 

GULF COAST

SEVENTH DISTRICT 

Sec. 

80.740 Long Key, FL to Cape Sable, FL. 

80.745 Cape Sable, FL to Cape Romano, FL. 

80.748 Cape Romano, FL to Sanibel Island, FL. 

80.750 Sanibel Island, FL to St. Petersburg, FL. 

80.753 St. Petersburg, FL to Anclote, FL. 

80.755 Anclote, FL to the Suncoast Keys, FL. 

80.757 Suncoast Keys, FL to Horseshoe Point, FL. 

80.760 Horseshoe Point, FL to Rock Island, FL. 

EIGHTH DISTRICT 

80.805 Rock Island, FL to Cape San Blas, FL. 

80.810 Cape San Blas, FL to Perdido Bay, FL. 

80.815 Mobile Bay, AL to the Chandeleur Island, 

LA. 

80.825 Mississippi Passes, LA. 

80.830 Mississippi Passes, LA to Point Au Fer, 

LA. 

80.835 Point Au Fer, LA to Calcasieu Pass, LA. 

80.840 Sabine Pass, TX to Galveston, TX. 

80.845 Galveston, TX to Freeport, TX. 

80.850 Brazos River, TX to the Rio Grande, TX. 

PACIFIC COAST

ELEVENTH DISTRICT 

80.1102 Santa Catalina Island, CA. 

80.1104 San Diego Harbor, CA. 

80.1106 Mission Bay, CA. 

80.1108 Oceanside Harbor, CA. 

80.1110 Dana Point Harbor, CA. 

80.1112 Newport Bay, CA. 

80.1114 San Pedro Bay-Anaheim Bay, CA. 

80.1116 Redondo Harbor, CA. 

80.1118 Marina Del Rey, CA. 

80.1120 Port Hueneme, CA. 

80.1122 Channel Islands Harbor, CA. 

80.1124 Ventura Marina, CA. 

80.1126 Santa Barbara Harbor, CA. 

80.1130 San Luis Obispo Bay, CA. 

80.1132 Estero-Morro Bay, CA. 

80.1134 Monterey Harbor, CA. 

80.1136 Moss Landing Harbor, CA. 

80.1138 Santa Cruz Harbor, CA. 

80.1140 Pillar Point Harbor, CA. 

80.1142 San Francisco Harbor, CA. 

80.1144 Bodega and Tomales Bay, CA. 

80.1146 Albion River, CA. 

80.1148 Noyo River, CA. 

80.1150 Arcata-Humboldt Bay, CA. 

80.1152 Crescent City Harbor, CA
147

THIRTEENTH DISTRICT 

Sec. 

80.1305 Chetco River, OR. 

80.1310 Rogue River, OR. 

80.1315 Coquille River, OR. 

80.1320 Coos Bay, OR. 

80.1325 Umpqua River, OR. 

80.1330 Siuslaw River, OR. 

80.1335 Alsea Bay, OR. 

80.1340 Yaquina Bay, OR. 

80.1345 Depoe Bay, OR. 

80.1350 Netarts Bay, OR. 

80.1355 Tillamook Bay, OR. 

80.1360 Nehalem River, OR. 

80.1365 Columbia River Entrance, OR/WA. 

80.1370 Willapa Bay, WA. 

80.1375 Grays Harbor, WA. 

80.1380 Quillayute River, WA. 

80.1385 Strait of Juan de Fuca. 

80.1390 Haro Strait and Strait of Georgia. 

80.1395 Puget Sound and adjacent waters. 

PACIFIC ISLANDS 

FOURTEENTH DISTRICT 

80.1410 Hawaiian Island Exemption from General 

Rule. 

80.1420 Mamala Bay, Oahu, HI. 

80.1430 Kaneohe Bay, Oahu, HI. 

80.1440 Port Allen, Kauai, HI. 

80.1450 Nawiliwili Harbor, Kauai, HI. 

80.1460 Kahului Harbor, Maui, HI. 

80.1470 Kawaihae Harbor, Hawaii, HI. 

80.1480 Hilo Harbor, Hawaii, HI. 

80.1490 Apra Harbor, U.S. Territory of Guam. 

80.1495 U.S. Pacific Island Possessions. 

ALASKA 

SEVENTEENTH DISTRICT 

80.1705 Alaska. 

GENERAL 

§ 80.01 General basis and purpose of 

demarcation lines. 

(a) The regulations in this part establish the lines 

of demarcation delineating those waters upon 

which mariners shall comply with the International 

Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 

(72 COLREGS) and those waters upon which 

mariners shall comply with the Inland Navigation 

Rules. 

(b) The waters inside of the lines are Inland 

Rules Waters. The waters outside the lines are 

COLREGS Waters. 

ATLANTIC COAST 

FIRST DISTRICT 

§ 80.105 Calais, ME to Cape Small, ME. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on the harbors, 

bays, and inlets on the east coast of Maine from 

International Bridge at Calais, ME to the 

southwesternmost extremity of Bald Head at Cape 

Small. 

§ 80.110 Casco Bay, ME. 

(a) A line drawn from the southwesternmost 

extremity of Bald Head at Cape Small to the 

southeasternmost extremity of Ragged Island; 

thence to the southern tangent of Jaquish Island 

thence to Little Mark Island Monument Light; 

thence to the northernmost extremity of Jewell 

Island. 

(b) A line drawn from the tower on Jewell Island 

charted in approximate position latitude 43°40.6’ 

N., longitude 70°05.9’ W. to the northeasternmost 

extremity of Outer Green Island. 

(c) A line drawn from the southwesternmost 

extremity of Outer Green Island to Ram Island 

Ledge Light; thence to Portland Head Light. 

§ 80.115 Portland Head, ME to Cape Ann, MA. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described in 

this section, the 72 COLREGS shall apply on the 

harbors, bays, and inlets on the east coast of Maine, 

New Hampshire, and Massachusetts from Portland 

Head to Halibut Point at Cape Ann. 

(b) A line drawn from the southernmost tower 

on Gerrish Island charted in approximate position 

latitude 43°04.0’ N., longitude 70°41.2’ W. to 

Whaleback Light; thence to Jeffrey Point Light 2A; 

thence to the northeasternmost extremity of Frost 

Point. 

(c) A line drawn from the northernmost 

extremity of Farm Point to Annisquam Harbor 

Light. 

§ 80.120 Cape Ann, MA to Marblehead Neck, 

MA. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described in 

this section, the 72 COLREGS shall apply on the 

harbors, bays and inlets on the east coast of 

Massachusetts from Halibut Point at Cape Ann to 

Marblehead Neck. 

(b) A line drawn from Gloucester Breakwater 

Light to the twin towers charted in approximate 

position latitude 42°35.1’ N., longitude 70°41.6’ W. 

(c) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of Gales Point to the easternmost extremity of 

House Island; thence to Bakers Island Light; thence 

to Marblehead Light. 

§ 80.125 Marblehead Neck, MA to Nahant, MA. 

The 72 COLREGS apply on the harbors, bays, 

and inlets on the east coast of Massachusetts from 
148

Marblehead Neck to the easternmost tower at 

Nahant, charted in approximate position latitude 

42°25.4’ N., longitude 70°54.6’ W. 

§ 80.130 Boston Harbor entrance. 

A line drawn from the easternmost tower at 

Nahant, charted in approximate position latitude 

42°25.4’ N., longitude 70°54.6’ W., to Boston 

Lighted Horn Buoy “B”; thence to the easternmost 

radio tower at Hull, charted in approximate 

position latitude 42°16.7’ N., longitude 70°52.6’ W. 

§ 80.135 Hull, MA to Race Point, MA. 

(a) Except inside lines described in this section, 

the 72 COLREGS apply on the harbors, bays, and 

inlets on the east coast of Massachusetts from the 

easternmost radio tower at Hull, charted in 

approximate position latitude 42°16.7’ N., 

longitude 70°52.6’ W., to Race Point on Cape Cod. 

(b) A line drawn from Canal Breakwater Light 4 

south to the shoreline. 

§ 80.145 Race Point, MA to Watch Hill, RI. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described in 

this section, the 72 COLREGS shall apply on the 

sounds, bays, harbors and inlets along the coast of 

Cape Cod and the southern coasts of Massachusetts 

and Rhode Island from Race Point to Watch Hill. 

(b) A line drawn from Nobska Point Light to 

Tarpaulin Cove Light on the southeastern side of 

Naushon Island; thence from the southernmost 

tangent of Naushon Island to the easternmost 

extremity of Nashawena Island; thence from the 

southwestern most extremity of Nashawena Island 

to the easternmost extremity of Cuttyhunk Island; 

thence from the southwestern tangent of 

Cuttyhunk Island to the tower on Gooseberry Neck 

charted in approximate position latitude 41°29.1’ 

N., longitude 71°02.3’ W. 

(c) A line drawn from Sakonnet Breakwater 

Light 2 tangent to the southernmost part of 

Sachuest Point charted in approximate position 

latitude 41° 28.5’ N., longitude 71°14.8’ W. 

(d) An east-west line drawn through Beavertail 

Light between Brenton Point and the Boston Neck 

shoreline. 

§ 80.150 Block Island, RI. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on the harbors of 

Block Island. 

§ 80.155 Watch Hill, RI to Montauk Point, NY. 

(a) A line drawn from 41°18’13.999” N., 

071°51’30.300” W. (Watch Hill Light) to East Point 

on Fishers Island. 

(b) A line drawn from Race Point at 

41°14’36.509” N., 072°02’49.676” W. (Race Rock 

Light); thence to 41°12’22.900” N., 072°06’24.700” 

W. (Little Gull Island Light) thence to East Point 

on Plum Island. 

(c) A line drawn from 41°10’16.704” N., 

072°12’21.684’ W. (Plum Island Harbor East 

Dolphin Light) to 41°10’17.262” N., 

072°12’23.796” W. (Plum Island Harbor West 

Dolphin Light). 

(d) A line drawn from 41°10’25.745” N., 

072°12’42.137” W. (Plum Island Light) to 

41°09’48.393” N., 072°13’25.014” W. (Orient Point 

Light); thence to Orient Point. 

(e) A line drawn from the 41°06’35.100” N., 

072°18’21.400” W. (Long Beach Bar Light) to 

Cornelius Point. 

(f) A line drawn from 41°04’12.000” N., 

072°16’48.000” W. (Coecles Harbor Entrance 

Light) to Sungic Point. 

(g) A line drawn from Nicholl Point to 

41°02’25.166” N., 072°15’42.971” W. (Cedar Island 

Light 3CI). 

(h) A line drawn from 41°02’06.060” N., 

072°11’19.560” W. (Threemile Harbor West 

Breakwater Light) to 41°02’05.580” N., 

072°11’15.777” W. (Threemile Harbor East 

Breakwater Light). 

(i) A line drawn from 41°04’44.210” N., 

071°56’20.308” W. (Montauk West Jetty Light 2) to 

41°04’46.095” N., 071°56’14.168” W. (Montauk 

East Jetty Light 1). 

§ 80.160 Montauk Point, NY to Atlantic Beach, 

NY. 

(a) A line drawn from 40°50’17.952” N., 

072°28’29.010” W. (Shinnecock Inlet Breakwater 

Light 2) to 40°50’23.490” N., 072°28’40.122” W. 

(Shinnecock Inlet Breakwater Light 1). 

(b) A line drawn from 40°45’47.763” N., 

072°45’11.095” W. (Moriches Inlet Breakwater 

Light 2) to 40°45’49.692” N., 072°45’21.719” W. 

(Moriches Inlet Breakwater Light 1). 

(c) A line drawn from the westernmost point on 

Fire Island to the southernmost extremity of the 

spit of land at the western end of Oak Beach. 

(d) A line drawn from 40°34’23.568” N., 

073°34’32.364” (Jones Inlet Light) 322° true across 

Jones Inlet to the shoreline. 
149

§ 80.165 New York Harbor. 

A line drawn from 40°34’56.600” N., 

073°45’17.200” W. (East Rockaway Inlet 

Breakwater Light) to 40°27’42.177” N., 

074°00’07.309” W. (Sandy Hook Light). 

FIFTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.501 Sandy Hook, NJ to Toms River, NJ. 

(a) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

Shark River Inlet. 

(b) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

Manasquan Inlet. 

(c) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

Barnegat Inlet. 

§ 80.502 Toms River, NJ to Cape May, NJ. 

(a) A line drawn from the seaward tangent of 

Long Beach Island to the seaward tangent to Pullen 

Island across Beach Haven and Little Egg Inlet, 

thence across Brigantine Inlet to Brigantine Island. 

(b) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

Absecon Inlet. 

(c) A line drawn parallel with the general trend 

of highwater shoreline from the southernmost 

point of Longport at latitude 39°17.6’ N, longitude 

74°33.1’ W across Great Egg Harbor Inlet. 

(d) A line drawn parallel with the general trend 

of highwater shoreline across Corson Inlet. 

(e) A line formed by the centerline of the 

Townsend Inlet Highway Bridge. 

(f) A line formed by the shoreline of Seven Mile 

Beach to 39°00’23.757” N, 074°47’28.017” W. 

(Hereford Inlet Light). 

(g) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

Cape May Inlet. 

§ 80.503 Delaware Bay. 

A line drawn from Cape May Light to Harbor of 

Refuge Light; thence to the northernmost extremity 

of Cape Henlopen. 

§ 80.505 Cape Henlopen, DE to Cape Charles, 

VA. 

(a) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

Indian River Inlet North Jetty to Indian River Inlet 

South Jetty Light. 

(b) A line drawn from Ocean City Inlet Light 6 

225° true across Ocean City Inlet to the submerged 

south breakwater. 

(c) A line drawn from Assateague Beach Tower 

Light to the tower charted at latitude 37°52.6’ N., 

longitude 75°26.7’ W. 

(d) A line formed by the range of Wachapreague 

Inlet Light 3 and Parramore Beach Lookout Tower 

drawn across Wachapreague Inlet. 

(e) A line drawn from the lookout tower charted 

on the northern end of Hog Island to the seaward 

tangent of Parramore Beach. 

(f) A Line drawn 207° true from the lookout 

tower charted on the southern end of Hog Island 

across Great Machipongo Inlet. 

(g) A line formed by the range of the two cupolas 

charted on the southern end of Cobb Island drawn 

across Sand Shoal Inlet. 

(h) Except as provided elsewhere in this section 

from Cape Henlopen to Cape Charles, lines drawn 

parallel with the general trend of the highwater 

shoreline across the entrances to small bays and 

inlets. 

§ 80.510 Chesapeake Bay Entrance, VA. 

A line drawn from Cape Charles Light to Cape 

Henry Light. 

§ 80.515 Cape Henry, VA to Cape Hatteras, NC. 

(a) A line drawn from Rudee Inlet Jetty Light 2 

to Rudee Inlet Jetty Light 1. 

(b) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge across Oregon Inlet. 

§ 80.520 Cape Hatteras, NC to Cape Lookout, 

NC. 

(a) A line drawn from Hatteras Inlet Lookout 

Tower at latitude 35°11.8’ N., longitude 75°43.9’ W. 

255° true to the eastern end of Ocracoke Island. 

(b) A line drawn from the westernmost 

extremity of Ocracoke Island at latitude 35°04.0’ 

N., longitude 76°00.8’ W., to the northeasternmost 

extremity of Portsmouth Island at latitude 35°03.7’ 

N., longitude 76°02.3’ W. 

(c) A line drawn across Drum Inlet parallel with 

the general trend of the highwater shoreline. 

§ 80.525 Cape Lookout, NC to Cape Fear, NC. 

(a) A line drawn from Cape Lookout Light to the 

seaward tangent of the southeastern end of 

Shackleford Banks. 

(b) A line drawn from Morehead City Channel 

Range Front Light to the seaward extremity of the 

Beaufort Inlet west jetty. 

(c) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity of Bogue Banks at latitude 34°38.7’ N., 

longitude 77°06.0’ W., across Bogue Inlet to the 

northernmost extremity of Bear Beach at latitude 

34°38.5’ N., longitude 77°07.1’ W. 

(d) A line drawn from the easternmost extremity 

on the southern side of New River Inlet at latitude 

34°31.5’ N., longitude 77°20.6’ W., to the shoreline 

on the northeast side on New River Inlet. 

(e) A line drawn across New Topsail Inlet 

between the closest extremities of the shore on 

either side of the inlet parallel with the general trend 

of the highwater shoreline. 

(f) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

the jetty on the northeast side of Masonboro Inlet 

to the seaward extremity of the jetty on the 

southeast side of the Inlet. 
150

(g) Except as provided elsewhere in this section 

from Cape Lookout to Cape Fear, lines drawn 

parallel with the general trend of the highwater 

shoreline across the entrance of small bays and 

inlets. 

§ 80.530 Cape Fear, NC to Little River Inlet, 

NC. 

(a) A line drawn from the abandoned lighthouse 

charted in approximate position latitude 33° 52.4’ 

N., longitude 78°00.1’ W., across the Cape Fear 

River Entrance to Oak Island Light. 

(b) Except as provided elsewhere in this section 

from Cape Fear to Little River Inlet, lines drawn 

parallel with the general trend of the highwater 

shoreline across the entrance to small inlets. 

SEVENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.703 Little River Inlet, SC to Cape Romain, 

SC. 

(a) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of the sand spit on Bird Island to the easternmost 

extremity of Waties Island across Little River Inlet. 

(b) From Little River Inlet, a line drawn parallel 

with the general trend of the highwater shoreline 

across Hog Inlet; thence a line drawn from Murrels 

Inlet Light 2 to Murrels Inlet Light 1; thence a line 

drawn parallel with the general trend of the 

highwater shoreline across Midway Inlet, Pawleys 

Inlet and North Inlet. 

(c) A line drawn from the charted position of 

Winyah Bay North Jetty End Buoy 2N south to the 

Winyah Bay South Jetty. 

(d) A line drawn from Santee Point to the 

seaward tangent of Cedar Island. 

(e) A line drawn from Cedar Island Point west to 

Murphy Island. 

(f) A north-south line from the northernmost 

extremity of Cape Island Point to Murphy Island. 

§ 80.707 Cape Romain, SC to Sullivans Island, 

SC. 

(a) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of Cape Romain to the southeasternmost point on 

Raccoon Key. 

(b) A line drawn from the westernmost 

extremity of Raccoon Key to the northernmost 

extremity of Northeast Point. 

(c) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity of Bull Island to the easternmost 

extremity of Capers Island. 

(d) A line formed by the overhead power cable 

from Capers Island to Dewees Island. A line 

formed by the overhead power cable from Dewees 

Island to Isle of Palms. 

(e) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge between Isle of Palms and Sullivans 

Island over Breach Inlet. 

§ 80.710 Charleston Harbor, SC. 

(a) A line formed by the submerged north jetty 

from the shore to the west end of the north jetty. 

(b) A line drawn from across the seaward 

extremity of the Charleston Harbor Jetties. 

(c) A line drawn from the west end of the South 

Jetty across the South Entrance to Charleston 

Harbor to shore on a line formed by the submerged 

south jetty. 

§ 80.712 Morris Island, SC to Hilton Head 

Island, SC. 

(a) A line drawn from the easternmost tip of 

Folly Island to 32°41’37” N., 079°53’03" W. 

(abandoned lighthouse tower) on the northside of 

Lighthouse Inlet; thence west to the shoreline of 

Morris Island. 

(b) A straight line drawn from the seaward 

tangent of Folly Island across Stono River to the 

shoreline of Sandy Point. 

(c) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity of Seabrook Island 257° true across the 

North Edisto River Entrance to the shore of 

Botany Bay Island. 

(d) A line drawn from the microwave antenna 

tower on Edisto Beach charted in approximate 

position latitude 32°29.3’ N., longitude 80°19.2’ W., 

across St. Helena Sound to the abandoned 

lighthouse tower on Hunting Island. 

(e) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge between Hunting Island and Fripp 

Island. 

(f) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of Bull Point on Capers Island to Port Royal Sound 

Channel Range Rear Light, latitude 32°13.7’ N., 

longitude 80°36.0’ W.; thence 259° true to the 

easternmost extremity of Hilton Head at latitude 

32°13.7’ N., longitude 80°40.1’ W. 

§ 80.715 Savannah River. 

A line drawn from the southernmost tank on 

Hilton Head Island charted in approximate position 

latitude 32°06.7’ N., longitude 80°49.3’ W., to 

Bloody Point Range Rear Light; thence to Tybee 

Light. 

§ 80.717 Tybee Island, GA to St. Simons Island, 

GA. 

(a) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity of Savannah Beach on Tybee Island 255° 

true across Tybee Inlet to the shore of Little Tybee 

Island south of the entrance to Buck Hammock 

Creek. 

(b) A straight line drawn from the 

northeasternmost extremity of Wassaw Island 031° 

true through Tybee River Daybeacon 1 to the shore 

of Little Tybee Island. A line drawn approximately 

parallel with the general trend of the highwater 

shorelines from the seaward tangent of Wassaw 
151

Island to the seaward tangent of Bradley Point on 

Ossabaw Island. 

(c) A north-south line (longitude 81°08.4’ W.) 

drawn from the southernmost extremity of 

Ossabaw Island to St. Catherines Island. 

(d) A north-south line (longitude 81°10.6’ W.) 

drawn from the southernmost extremity of St. 

Catherines Island to North-east Point on 

Blackbeard Island. 

(e) A line following the general trend of the 

seaward highwater shoreline across Cabretta Inlet. 

(f) A north-south line (longitude 81°16.9’ W.) 

drawn from the southwesternmost point on Sapelo 

Island to Wolf Island. 

(g) A north-south line (longitude 81°17.1’ W.) 

drawn from the southeasternmost point of Wolf 

Island to the northeasternmost point on Little St. 

Simons Island. 

(h) A line drawn from the northeasternmost 

extremity of Sea Island 045° true to Little St. 

Simons Island. 

(i) An east-west line from the southernmost 

extremity of Sea Island across Goulds Inlet to St. 

Simons Island. 

§ 80.720 St. Simons Island, GA to Amelia 

Island, FL. 

(a) A line drawn from St. Simons Light to the 

northernmost tank on Jekyll Island charted in 

approximate position latitude 31°05.9’ N., 

longitude 81° 24.5’ W. 

(b) A line drawn from the southernmost tank on 

Jekyll Island charted in approximate position 

latitude 31°01.6’ N., longitude 81°25.2’ W., to 

coordinate latitude 30°59.4’ N., longitude 81°23.7’ 

W., (0.5 nautical mile east of the charted position of 

St. Andrew Sound Lighted Buoy 32); thence to the 

abandoned lighthouse tower on the north end of 

Little Cumberland Island charted in approximate 

position latitude 30°58.5’ N., longitude 81°24.8’ W. 

(c) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the St. Marys Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.723 Amelia Island, FL to Cape Canaveral, 

FL. 

(a) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity of Amelia Island to the northeasternmost 

extremity of Little Talbot Island. 

(b) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge from Little Talbot Island to Fort 

George Island. 

(c) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the St. Johns River Entrance Jetties. 

(d) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the St. Augustine Inlet Jetties. 

(e) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge over Matanzas Inlet. 

(f) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Ponce de Leon Inlet Jetties. 

§ 80.727 Cape Canaveral, FL to Miami Beach, 

FL. 

(a) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Port Canaveral Entrance Channel Jetties. 

(b) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Sebastian Inlet Jetties. 

(c) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Fort Pierce Inlet Jetties. 

(d) A north-south line (longitude 80° 09.7’ W.) 

drawn across St. Lucie Inlet. 

(e) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

Jupiter Inlet North Jetty to the northeast extremity 

of the concrete apron on the south side of Jupiter 

inlet. 

(f) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Lake Worth Inlet Jetties. 

(g) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Boynton Inlet Jetties. 

(h) A line drawn from Boca Raton Inlet North 

Jetty Light 2 to Boca Raton Inlet South Jetty Light 

1. 

(i) A line drawn from Hillsboro Inlet Light to 

Hillsboro Inlet Entrance Light 2; thence to 

Hillsboro Inlet Entrance Light 1; thence west to the 

shoreline. 

(j) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Port Everglades Entrance Jetties. 

(k) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge over Bakers Haulover Inlet. 

§ 80.730 Miami Harbor, FL. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremity of the 

Miami Harbor Government Cut Jetties. 

§ 80.735 Miami, FL to Long Key, FL. 

(a) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity of Fisher Island 212° true to the point 

latitude 25°45.0’ N., longitude 80° 08.6’ W., on 

Virginia Key. 

(b) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge between Virginia Key and Key 

Biscayne. 

(c) A line drawn from Cape Florida Light to the 

northern most extremity on Soldier Key. 

(d) A line drawn from the southernmost 

extremity on Soldier Key to the northernmost 

extremity of the Ragged Keys. 

(e) A line drawn from the Ragged Keys to the 

southernmost extremity of Angelfish Key following 

the general trend of the seaward shoreline. 

(f) A line drawn on the centerline of the 

Overseas Highway (U.S. 1) and bridges from 

latitude 25°19.3’ N., longitude 80°16.0’ W., at Little 

Angelfish Creek to the radar dome charted on Long 

Key at approximate position latitude 24°49.3’ N., 

longitude 80°49.2’ W. 

CARIBBEAN ISLANDS 
152

SEVENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.738 Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described in 

this section, the 72 COLREGS shall apply on all 

other bays, harbors and lagoons of Puerto Rico and 

the U.S. Virgin Islands. 

(b) A line drawn from Puerto San Juan Light to 

position 18o28.5’ N., 066o08.4’ W, at the northwest 

extent of Isla de Cabras across the entrance of San 

Juan Harbor. 

GULF COAST 

SEVENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.740 Long Key, FL to Cape Sable, FL. 

A line drawn from the microwave tower charted 

on Long Key at approximate position latitude 

24° 48.8’ N., longitude 80° 49.6’ W., to Long Key 

Light 1; thence to Arsenic Bank Light 2; thence to 

Sprigger Bank Light 5; thence to Schooner Bank 

Light 6; thence to Oxfoot Bank Light 10; thence to 

East Cape Light 2; thence through East Cape 

Daybeacon 1A to the shoreline at East Cape. 

§ 80.745 Cape Sable, FL to Cape Romano, FL. 

(a) A line drawn following the general trend of 

the mainland, highwater shoreline from Cape Sable 

at East Cape to Little Shark River Light 1; thence to 

westernmost extremity of Shark Point; thence 

following the general trend of the mainland, 

highwater shoreline crossing the entrances of 

Harney River, Broad Creek, Broad River, Rodgers 

River First Bay, Chatham River, Huston River, to 

the shoreline at coordinate latitude 25°41.8’ N., 

longitude 81°17.9’ W. 

(b) The 72 COLREGS shall apply to the waters 

surrounding the Ten Thousand Islands and the 

bays, creeks, inlets, and rivers between Chatham 

Bend and Marco Island except inside lines 

specifically described in this part. 

(c) A north-south line drawn at longitude 

81°20.2’ W., across the entrance to Lopez River. 

(d) A line drawn across the entrance to Turner 

River parallel to the general trend of the shoreline. 

(e) A line formed by the centerline of Highway 

92 Bridge at Goodland. 

§ 80.748 Cape Romano, FL to Sanibel Island, 

FL. 

(a) A line drawn across Big Marco Pass parallel 

to the general trend of the seaward, highwater 

shoreline. 

(b) A line drawn from the northwesternmost 

extremity of Coconut Island 000°T across Capri 

Pass. 

(c) Lines drawn across Hurricane and Little 

Marco Passes parallel to the general trend of the 

seaward, highwater shoreline. 

(d) A line from the seaward extremity of Gordon 

Pass South Jetty 014° true to the shoreline at 

approximate coordinate latitude 26°05.7’ N., 

longitude 81°48.1’ W. 

(e) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

Doctors Pass Jetties. 

(f) Lines drawn across Wiggins, Big Hickory, 

New, and Big Carlos Passes parallel to the general 

trend of the seaward highwater shoreline. 

(g) A straight line drawn from Sanibel Island 

Light through Matanzas Pass Channel Light 2 to 

the shore of Estero Island. 

§ 80.750 Sanibel Island, FL to St. Petersburg, 

FL. 

(a) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge over Blind Pass, between Captiva 

Island and Sanibel Island, and lines drawn across 

Redfish and Captiva Passes parallel to the general 

trend of the seaward, highwater shorelines. 

(b) A line drawn from La Costa Test Pile North 

Light to Port Boca Grande Light. 

(c) Lines drawn across Gasparilla and Stump 

Passes parallel to the general trend of the seaward, 

highwater shorelines. 

(d) A line across the seaward extremity of Venice 

Inlet Jetties. 

(e) A line drawn across Midnight Pass parallel to 

the general trend of the seaward, highwater 

shoreline. 

(f) A line drawn from Big Sarasota Pass Light 14 

to the southernmost extremity of Lido Key. 

(g) A line drawn across New Pass tangent to the 

seaward, highwater shoreline of Longboat Key. 

(h) A line drawn across Longboat Pass parallel 

to the seaward, highwater shoreline. 

(i) A line drawn from the northwesternmost 

extremity of Bean Point to the southeasternmost 

extremity of Egmont Key. 

(j) A straight line drawn from Egmont Key Light 

through Egmont Channel Range Rear Light to the 

shoreline on Mullet Key. 

(k) A line drawn from the northernmost 

extremity of Mullet Key across Bunces Pass and 

South Channel to Pass-a-Grille Channel Light 8; 

thence to Pass-a-Grille Channel Daybeacon 9; 

thence to the southwesternmost extremity of Long 

Key. 

§ 80.753 St. Petersburg, FL to the Anclote, FL. 

(a) A line drawn across Blind Pass, between 

Treasure Island and Long Key, parallel with the 

general trend of the seaward, highwater shoreline. 

(b) Lines formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridges over Johns and Clearwater Passes. 

(c) A line drawn across Dunedin and Hurricane 

Passes parallel with the general trend of the 

seaward, highwater shoreline. 
153

(d) A line drawn from the northernmost 

extremity of Honeymoon Island to Anclote 

Anchorage South Entrance Light 7; thence to 

Anclote Key 28°10.0’ N., 82°50.6’ W; thence a 

straight line through Anclote River Cut B Range 

Rear Light to the shoreline. 

§ 80.755 Anclote, FL to the Suncoast Keys, FL. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described in 

this section, the 72 COLREGS shall apply on the 

bays, bayous, creeks, marinas, and rivers from 

Anclote to the Suncoast Keys. 

(b) A north-south line drawn at longitude 

82°38.3’ W., across the Chassahowitzka River 

Entrance. 

§ 80.757 Suncoast Keys, FL to Horseshoe Point, 

FL. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described in 

this section, the 72 COLREGS shall apply on the 

bays, bayous, creeks, and marinas from the 

Suncoast Keys to Horseshoe Point. 

(b) A line formed by the centerline of Highway 

44 Bridge over the Salt River. 

(c) A north-south line drawn through Crystal 

River Entrance Daybeacon 25 across the river 

entrance. 

(d) A north-south line drawn through the Cross 

Florida Barge Canal Daybeacon 48 across the canal. 

(e) A north-south line drawn through 

Withlacoochee River Daybeacon 40 across the 

river. 

(f) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of South Point north to the shoreline across the 

Waccasassa River Entrance. 

(g) A line drawn from position latitude 29°16.6’ 

N., longitude 83°06.7’ W., 300° true to the shoreline 

of Hog Island. 

(h) A north-south line drawn through Suwannee 

River Mcgriff Pass Daybeacons 30 and 31 across 

the Suwannee River. 

§ 80.760 Horseshoe Point, FL to Rock Islands, 

FL. 

(a) Except inside lines specifically described 

provided in this section, the 72 COLREGS shall 

apply on the bays, bayous, creeks, marinas, and 

rivers from Horseshoe Point to the Rock Islands. 

(b) A north-south line drawn through 

Steinhatchee River Light 21. 

(c) A line drawn from Fenholloway River 

Approach Light FR east across the entrance to 

Fenholloway River. 

EIGHTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.805 Rock Island, FL to Cape San Blas, FL. 

(a) A north-south line drawn from the Econfina 

River Light to the opposite shore. 

(b) A line drawn from Gamble Point Light to the 

southernmost extremity of Cabell Point. 

(c) A line drawn from St. Marks Range Rear 

Light to St. Marks Channel Light 11; thence to the 

southernmost extremity of Live Oak Point; thence 

in a straight line through Shell Point Light to the 

southernmost extremity of Ochlockonee Point; 

thence to Bald Point along longitude 84°20.5’ W. 

(d) A line drawn from the south shore of 

Southwest Cape at longitude 84°22.7’ W., to Dog 

Island Reef East Light 1; thence a straight line to 

the easternmost extremity of Dog Island. 

(e) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of Dog Island to the easternmost extremity of St. 

George Island. 

(f) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the St. George Island Channel Jetties. 

(g) A line drawn from the northwesternmost 

extremity of Sand Island to West Pass Light 7. 

(h) A line drawn from the westernmost 

extremity of St. Vincent Island to the southeast, 

highwater shoreline of Indian Peninsula at 

longitude 85°13.5’ W. 

§ 80.810 Cape San Blas, FL to Perdido Bay, FL. 

(a) A line drawn from St. Joseph Bay Entrance 

Range A Rear Light through St. Joseph Bay 

Entrance Range B Front Light to St. Joseph Point. 

(b) A line drawn across the mouth of Salt Creek 

as an extension of the general trend of the shoreline 

to continue across the inlet to St. Andrews Sound 

in the middle of Crooked Island. 

(c) A line drawn from the northernmost 

extremity of Crooked Island 000° T. to the 

mainland. 

(d) A line drawn from the easternmost extremity 

of Shell Island 120° true to the shoreline across the 

east entrance to St. Andrews Bay. 

(e) A line drawn between the seaward end of the 

St. Andrews Bay Entrance Jetties. 

(f) A line drawn between the seaward end of the 

Choctawatchee Bay Entrance Jetties. 

(g) An east-west line drawn from Fort McRee 

Leading Light across the Pensacola Bay Entrance 

along latitude 30°19.5’ N. 

(h) A line drawn between the seaward end of the 

Perdido Pass Jetties. 
154

§ 80.815 Mobile Bay, AL to the Chandeleur 

Islands, LA. 

(a) A line drawn across the in lets to Little 

Lagoon as an extension of the general trend of the 

shoreline. 

(b) A line drawn from 30°14’41.4” N., 

088°01’26.5” W. (Mobile Point Light) to 

30°15’13.3” N., 088°03’22.6” W. (Dauphin Island 

Channel Light 1) to the eastern corner of Fort 

Gaines at Pelican Point. A line drawn from the 

westernmost extremity of Dauphin Island to the 

easternmost extremity of Petit Bois Island. 

(c) A line drawn from Horn Island Pass 

Entrance Range Front Light on Petit Bois Island to 

the easternmost extremity of Horn Island. 

(d) An east-west line (latitude 30°14.7’ N.) drawn 

between the westernmost extremity of Horn Island 

to the easternmost extremity of Ship Island. 

(e) A curved line drawn following the general 

trend of the seaward, highwater shoreline of Ship 

Island. 

(f) A line drawn from Ship Island Light to 

Chandeleur Light; thence in a curved line following 

the general trend of the seaward, highwater 

shorelines of the Chandeleur Islands to the island at 

latitude 29°44.1’ N., longitude 88°53.0’ W.; thence 

to latitude 29°26.5’ N., longitude 88° 55.6’ W. 

§ 80.825 Mississippi Passes, LA. 

(a) A line drawn from latitude 29°26.5’ N., 

longitude 88°55.6’ W. to latitude 29°10.6’ N., 

longitude 88°59.8’ W.; thence to latitude 29°03.5’ 

N., longitude 89°03.7’ W.; thence to latitude 

28°58.8’ N., longitude 89°04.3’ W. 

(b) A line drawn from latitude 28°58.8’ N., 

longitude 89°04.3’ W.; to latitude 28°57.3’ N., 

longitude 89°05.3’ W.; thence to latitude 28°56.95’ 

N., longitude 89°05.6’ W.; thence to latitude 

29°00.4’ N., longitude 89°09.8’ W.; thence 

following the general trend of the seaward 

highwater shoreline in a northwesterly direction to 

latitude 29°03.4’ N., longitude 89°13.0’ W.; thence 

west to latitude 29°03.5’ N., longitude 89°15.5’ W.; 

thence following the general trend of the seaward 

high water shoreline in a southwesterly direction to 

latitude 28°57.7’ N., longitude 89°22.3’ W. 

(c) A line drawn from latitude 28°57.7’ N., 

longitude 89°22.3’ W.; to latitude 28°51.4’ N., 

longitude 89°24.5’ W.; thence to latitude 28°52.65’ 

N., longitude 89°27.1’ W.; thence to the seaward 

extremity of the Southwest Pass West Jetty located 

at latitude 28°54.5’ N., longitude 89°26.1’ W. 

§ 80.830 Mississippi Passes, LA to Point Au 

Fer, LA. 

(a) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

the Southwest Pass West Jetty located at coordinate 

latitude 28°54.5’ N., longitude 89°26.1’ W.; thence 

following the general trend of the seaward, 

highwater jetty and shoreline in a north, 

northeasterly direction to Old Tower latitude 

28°58.8’ N., longitude 89°23.3’ W.; thence to 

westernmost point near Pass du Bois; thence to 

coordinate latitude 29°05.2’ N., longitude 

89°24.3’ W.; thence a curved line following the 

general trend of the highwater shoreline to Point 

Au Fer Island except as otherwise described in this 

section. 

(b) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Empire Waterway (Bayou Fontanelle) entrance 

jetties. 

(c) An east-west line drawn from the 

westernmost extremity of Grand Terre Islands in 

the direction of 194° true to the Grand Isle Fishing 

Jetty Light. 

(d) A line drawn between the seaward extremity 

of the Belle Pass Jetties. 

(e) A line drawn from the westernmost extremity 

of the Timbalier Island to the easternmost 

extremity of Isles Dernieres. 

(f) A north-south line drawn from Caillou Bay 

Light 13 across Caillou Boca. 

(g) A line drawn 107° true from Caillou Bay Boat 

Landing Light across the entrances to Grand Bayou 

du Large and Bayou Grand Caillou. 

(h) A line drawn on an axis of 103° true through 

Taylors Bayou Entrance Light 2 across the 

entrances to Jack Stout Bayou, Taylors Bayou, 

Pelican Pass, and Bayou de West. 

§ 80.835 Point Au Fer, LA to Calcasieu Pass, 

LA. 

(a) A line drawn from Point Au Fer to 

Atchafalaya Channel Light 34; thence to 

Atchafalaya Channel Light 33; thence to 

Atchafalaya Bay Pipeline Light D latitude 29°25.0’ 

N., longitude 91°31.7’ W.; thence to Atchafalaya 

Bay Light 1 latitude 29°25.3’ N., longitude 91°35.8’ 

W.; thence to South Point. 

(b) Lines following the general trend of the 

highwater shoreline drawn across the bayou and 

canal inlets from the Gulf of Mexico between South 

Point and Calcasieu Pass except as otherwise 

described in this section. 

(c) A line drawn on an axis of 140° true through 

Southwest Pass Vermillion Bay Light 4 across 

Southwest Pass. 

(d) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Freshwater Bayou Canal Entrance Jetties. 

(e) A line drawn from Mermentau Channel East 

Jetty Light 6 to Mermentau Channel West Jetty 

Light 7. 
155

(f) A line drawn from the radio tower charted in 

approximate position latitude 29°45.7’ N., 

longitude 93°06.3’ W., 115° true across Mermentau 

Pass. 

(g) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Calcasieu Pass Jetties. 

§ 80.840 Sabine Pass, TX to Galveston, TX. 

(a) A line drawn from the Sabine Pass East Jetty 

Light to the seaward end of the Sabine Pass West 

Jetty. 

(b) A line drawn across the small boat passes 

through the Sabine Pass East and West Jetties. 

(c) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge over Rollover Pass at Gilchrist. 

§ 80.845 Galveston, TX to Freeport, TX. 

(a) A line drawn from Galveston North Jetty 

Light 6A to Galveston South Jetty Light 5A. 

(b) A line formed by the centerline of the 

highway bridge over San Luis Pass. 

(c) Lines formed by the centerlines of the 

highway bridges over the inlets to Christmas Bay 

(Cedar Cut) and Drum Bay. 

(d) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

the Freeport North Jetty to Freeport Entrance 

Light 6; thence to Freeport Entrance Light 7; 

thence to the seaward extremity of Freeport South 

Jetty. 

§ 80.850 Brazos River, TX to the Rio Grande, 

TX. 

(a) Except as otherwise described in this section 

lines drawn continuing the general trend of the 

seaward, highwater shorelines across the inlets to 

Brazos River Diversion Channel, San Bernard 

River, Cedar Lakes, Brown Cedar Cut, Colorado 

River, Matagorda Bay, Cedar Bayou, Corpus Christi 

Bay, and Laguna Madre. 

(b) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

Matagorda Ship Channel North Jetties. 

(c) A line drawn from the seaward tangent of 

Matagorda Peninsula at Decros Point to Matagorda 

Light. 

(d) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Aransas Pass Jetties. 

(e) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Port Mansfield Entrance Jetties. 

(f) A line drawn across the seaward extremity of 

the Brazos Santiago Pass Jetties. 

PACIFIC COAST 

ELEVENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.1102 Santa Catalina Island, CA. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply to the harbors on 

Santa Catalina Island. 

§ 80.1104 San Diego Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Zuniga Jetty Light “V” to 

Zuniga Jetty Light “Z”; thence to Point Loma 

Light. 

§ 80.1106 Mission Bay, CA. 

A line drawn from Mission Bay South Jetty Light 

2 to Mission Bay North Jetty Light 1. 

§ 80.1108 Oceanside Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Oceanside South Jetty Light 

4 to Oceanside Breakwater Light 3. 

§ 80.1110 Dana Point Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Dana Point Jetty Light 4 to 

Dana Point Breakwater Light 3. 

§ 80.1112 Newport Bay, CA. 

A line drawn from Newport Bay East Jetty Light 

4 to Newport Bay West Jetty Light 3. 

§ 80.1114 San Pedro Bay- Anaheim Bay, CA. 

(a) A line drawn across the seaward extremities 

of the Anaheim Bay Entrance East Jetties; thence 

to Long Beach Breakwater East End Light 1. 

(b) A line drawn from Long Beach Channel 

Entrance Light 2 to Long Beach Light. 

(c) A line drawn from Los Angeles Main 

Entrance Channel Light 2 to Los Angeles Light. 

§ 80.1116 Redondo Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Redondo Beach East Jetty 

Light 2 to Redondo Beach West Jetty Light 3. 

§ 80.1118 Marina Del Rey, CA. 

(a) A line drawn from Marina Del Rey 

Breakwater South Light 1 to Marina Del Rey Light 

4. 

(b) A line drawn from Marina Del Rey 

Breakwater North Light 2 to Marina Del Rey Light 

3. 

(c) A line drawn from Marina Del Rey Light 4 to 

the seaward extremity of the Ballona Creek South 

Jetty. 

§ 80.1120 Port Hueneme, CA. 

A line drawn from Port Hueneme East Jetty 

Light 4 to Port Hueneme West Jetty Light 3. 

§ 80.1122 Channel Islands Harbor, CA. 

(a) A line drawn from Channel Islands Harbor 

South Jetty Light 2 to Channel Islands Harbor 

Breakwater South Light 1. 

(b) A line drawn from Channel Islands Harbor 

Breakwater North Light to Channel Islands Harbor 

North Jetty Light 5. 
156

§ 80.1124 Ventura Marina, CA. 

A line drawn from Ventura Marina South Jetty 

Light 6 to Ventura Marina Breakwater South Light 

3; thence to Ventura Marina North Jetty Light 7. 

§ 80.1126 Santa Barbara Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Santa Barbara Harbor Light 

4 to Santa Barbara Harbor Breakwater Light. 

§ 80.1130 San Luis Obispo Bay, CA. 

A line drawn from the southernmost extremity 

of Fossil Point to the seaward extremity of Whaler 

Island Breakwater. 

§ 80.1132 Estero-Morro Bay, CA. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of the 

Morro Bay East Breakwater to the Morro Bay West 

Breakwater Light. 

§ 80.1134 Monterey Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Monterey Harbor Light 6 to 

the northern extremity of Monterey Municipal 

Wharf 2. 

§ 80.1136 Moss Landing Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of the 

pier located 0.3 mile south of Moss Landing Harbor 

Entrance to the seaward extremity of the Moss 

Landing Harbor North Breakwater. 

§ 80.1138 Santa Cruz Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of the 

Santa Cruz Harbor East Breakwater to Santa Cruz 

Harbor West Breakwater Light; thence to Santa 

Cruz Light. 

§ 80.1140 Pillar Point Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Pillar Point Harbor Light 6 to 

Pillar Point Harbor Entrance Light. 

§ 80.1142 San Francisco Harbor, CA. 

A straight line drawn from Point Bonita Light 

through Mile Rocks Light to the shore. 

§ 80.1144 Bodega and Tomales Bay, CA. 

(a) An east-west line drawn from Sand Point to 

Avalis Beach. 

(b) A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

Bodega Harbor North Breakwater to Bodega 

Harbor Entrance Light 1. 

§ 80.1146 Albion River, CA. 

A line drawn on an axis of 030° true through 

Albion River Light 1 across Albion Cove. 

§ 80.1148 Noyo River, CA. 

A line drawn from Noyo River Entrance 

Daybeacon 4 to Noyo River Entrance Light 5. 

§ 80.1150 Arcata-Humboldt Bay, CA. 

A line drawn from Humboldt Bay Entrance 

Light 4 to Humboldt Bay Entrance Light 3. 

§ 80.1152 Crescent City Harbor, CA. 

A line drawn from Crescent City Entrance Light 

to the southeasternmost extremity of Whaler 

Island. 

THIRTEENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.1305 Chetco River, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Chetco River Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1310 Rogue River, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Rogue River Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1315 Coquille River, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Coquille River Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1320 Coos Bay, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Coos Bay Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1325 Umpqua River, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Umpqua Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1330 Siuslaw River, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Siuslaw River Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1335 Alsea Bay, OR. 

A line drawn from the seaward shoreline on the 

north of the Alsea Bay Entrance 165° true across 

the channel entrance. 

§ 80.1340 Yaquina Bay, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

Yaquina Bay Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1345 Depoe Bay, OR. 

A line drawn across the Depoe Bay Channel 

entrance parallel with the general trend of the 

highwater shoreline. 

§ 80.1350 Netarts Bay, OR. 

A line drawn from the northernmost extremity 

of the shore on the south side of Netarts Bay north 

to the opposite shoreline. 

§ 80.1355 Tillamook Bay, OR. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities of 

the Tillamook Bay Entrance Jetties. 
157

§ 80.1360 Nehalem River, OR. 

A line drawn approximately parallel with the 

general trend of the highwater shoreline across the 

Nehalem River Entrance. 

§ 80.1365 Columbia River Entrance, OR/WA. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of the 

Columbia River North Jetty (above water) 155° true 

to the seaward extremity of the Columbia River 

South Jetty (above water). 

§ 80.1370 Willapa Bay, WA. 

A line drawn from Willapa Bay Light 169.8° true 

to the westernmost tripod charted 1.6 miles south 

of Leadbetter Point. 

§ 80.1375 Grays Harbor, WA. 

A line drawn across the seaward extremities 

(above water) of the Grays Harbor Entrance Jetties. 

§ 80.1380 Quillayute River, WA. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of the 

Quillayute River Entrance East Jetty to the 

overhead power cable tower charted on James 

Island; thence a straight line through Quillayute 

River Entrance Light 3 to the shoreline. 

§ 80.1385 Strait of Juan de Fuca. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on all waters of 

the Strait of Juan de Fuca. 

§ 80.1390 Haro Strait and Strait of Georgia. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on all waters of 

the Haro Strait and the Strait of Georgia. 

§ 80.1395 Puget Sound and Adjacent Waters. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on all waters of 

Puget Sound and adjacent waters, including Lake 

Union, Lake Washington, Hood Canal, and all 

tributaries. 

PACIFIC ISLANDS 

FOURTEENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.1410 Hawaiian Island Exemption from 

General Rule. 

Except as provided elsewhere in this part for 

Mamala Bay and Kaneohe Bay on Oahu; Port Allen 

and Nawiliwili Bay on Kauai; Kahului Harbor on 

Maui; and Kawailae and Hilo Harbors on Hawaii, 

the 72 COLREGS shall apply on all other bays, 

harbors, and lagoons of the Hawaiian Island 

(including Midway). 

§ 80.1420 Mamala Bay, Oahu, HI. 

A line drawn from 21°17’46.9” N., 158°06’22.2" 

W. (Barbers Point Light), 21°15’20.5” N., 

157°48’34.3” W. (Diamond Head Light). 

§ 80.1430 Kaneohe Bay, Oahu, HI. 

A line drawn from 21°27’44.1” N., 157°45’48.6” 

W. (Pyramid Rock Light), across Kaneohe Bay 

through the center of Mokolii Island to the 

shoreline. 

§ 80.1440 Port Allen, Kauai, HI. 

A line drawn from 21°53’34.3” N., 159°36’15.6” 

W. (Puolo Point Light) to 21°53’49.0” N., 

159°35’27.2” W. (Hanapepe Breakwater Light 2). 

§ 80.1450 Nawiliwili Harbor, Kauai, HI. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of 

Nawiliwili Harbor breakwater to 21°57’23.8” N., 

159°20’52.7” W. (Kukii Point Light). 

§ 80.1460 Kahului Harbor, Maui, HI. 

A line drawn from 20°54’04.1” N., 156°28’26.8” 

W. (Kahului Entrance Breakwater Light 4), to 

20°54’02.3” N., 156°28’26.8” W. (Kahului 

Entrance Breakwater Light 4). 

§ 80.1470 Kawaihae Harbor, Hawaii, HI. 

A line drawn from 20°02’29.1” N., 155°49’58.2” 

W. (Kawaihae Light), to the seaward extremity of 

the Kawaihae South Breakwater. 

§ 80.1480 Hilo Harbor, Hawaii, HI. 

A line drawn from the seaward extremity of the 

Hilo Breakwater 265° true (as an extension of the 

seaward side of the breakwater) to the shoreline 0.2 

nautical mile north of Alealea Point. 

§ 80.1490 Apra Harbor, U.S. Territory of Guam. 

A line drawn from the westernmost extremity of 

Orote Island to the westernmost extremity of Glass 

Breakwater. 

§ 80.1495 U.S. Pacific Island Possessions. 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on the bays, 

harbors, lagoons, and waters surrounding the U.S. 

Pacific Island Possessions of American Samoa, 

Baker, Howland, Jarvis, Johnson, Palmyra, Swains 

and Wake Island. 

ALASKA 

SEVENTEENTH DISTRICT 

§ 80.1705 Alaska 

The 72 COLREGS shall apply on all the sounds, 

bays, harbors, and inlets of Alaska. 
158

OPERATIONS OF VESSELS GENERALLY

46 U.S.C. 2301-2307 

Sec. 

2301 Application 

2302 Penalties for negligent 

operations and interfering with 

safe operations 

2303 Duties related to marine casualty 

assistance. 

2303a Post serious marine casualty 

alcohol testing 

2304 Duty to provide assistance at 

sea 

2305 Injunctions 

2306 Vessel reporting requirements 

2307 Limitation of liability for CG 

VTS pilots 

§ 2301 Application 

Except as provided in sections 2304 and 2306 of this title, this chapter applies 

to a vessel operated on waters subject to the jurisdiction of the United States 

(including the territorial sea of the United States as described in Presidential 

Proclamation No. 5928 of December 27. 1988) and, for a vessel owned in the 

United States, on the high seas. 

§ 2302 Penalties for negligent operations and interfering with safe 

operations 

(a) A person operating a vessel in a negligent manner or interfering with the 

safe operation of a vessel so as to endanger the life, limb, or property of a person 

is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty of not more than 

$5,000 in the case of a recreational vessel or $25,000 in the case of any other 

vessel. 

(b) A person operating a vessel in a grossly negligent manner that endangers 

the life, limb, or property of a person commits a class A misdemeanor. 

(c) An individual who is under the influence of alcohol, or a dangerous drug in 

violation of a law of the United States when operating a vessel, as determined 

under standards prescribed by the Secretary by regulation— 

(1) is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty of not more 

than $5,000; or 

(2) commits a class A misdemeanor. 

(d) For a penalty imposed under this section, the vessel also is liable in rem 

unless the vessel is— 

(1) owned by a State or a political subdivision of a State; 

(2) operated principally for governmental purposes; and 

(3) identified clearly as a vessel of that State or subdivision. 

(e) (1) A vessel may not transport Government-impelled cargoes if – 

(A) the vessel has been detained and determined to be substandard by the 

Secretary for violation of an international safety convention to which the 

United States is a party, and the Secretary has published notice of the 

detention and determination in an electronic form, including the name 

of the owner of the vessel; or 
159

(B) the operator of the vessel has on more than one occasion had a 

vessel detained and determined to be substandard by the Secretary for 

violation of an international safety convention to which the United 

States is a party, and the Secretary has published notice of the detention 

and determination in an electronic form, including the name of the 

owner of the vessel. 

(2) The prohibition in paragraph (1) expires for a vessel on the earlier of – 

(A) 1 year after the date of the publication in electronic form on which 

the prohibition is based; or 

(B) any date on which the owner or operator of the vessel prevails in an 

appeal of the violation of the relevant international convention on 

which the detention is based. 

(3) As used in this subsection, the term “Government-impelled cargo” 

means cargo for which a Federal agency contracts directly for shipping by 

water or for which (or the freight of which) a Federal agency provides the 

financing, including financing by grant, loan or loan guarantee, resulting in 

shipment of the cargo by water. 

§ 2303 Duties related to marine casualty assistance and information 

(a) The master or individual in charge of a vessel involved in a marine casualty 

shall— 

(1) render necessary assistance to each individual affected to save that 

affected individual from danger caused by the marine casualty, so far as the 

master or individual in charge can do so without serious danger to the 

master’s or individual’s vessel or to individuals on board; and 

(2) give the master’s or individual’s name and address and identification of 

the vessel to the master or individual in charge of any other vessel involved 

in the casualty, to any individual injured, and to the owner of any property 

damaged. 

(b) An individual violating this section or a regulation prescribed under this 

section shall be fined not more than $1,000 or imprisoned for not more than 2 

years. The vessel also is liable in rem to the United States Government for the 

fine. 

(c) An individual complying with subsection (a) of this section or gratuitously 

and in good faith rendering assistance at the scene of a marine casualty without 

objection by an individual assisted, is not liable for damages as a result of 

rendering assistance or for an act or omission in providing or arranging salvage, 

towage, medical treatment, or other assistance when the individual acts as an 

ordinary, reasonable, and prudent individual would have acted under the 

circumstances.

 
160

OPERATIONS OF VESSELS—CONTINUED 

§ 2303a Post serious marine casualty alcohol testing 

(a) The Secretary shall establish procedures to ensure that after a serious marine 

casualty occurs, alcohol testing of crew members or other persons responsible for 

the operation of other safety-sensitive functions of the vessel or vessels involved 

in such casualty is conducted no later than 2 hours after the casualty occurs, unless 

such testing cannot be completed within that time due to safety concerns directly 

related to the casualty. 

(b) The procedures in subsection (a) shall require that if alcohol testing cannot 

be completed within 2 hours of the occurrence of the casualty, such testing shall 

be conducted as soon thereafter as the safety concerns in subsection (a) have been 

adequately addressed to permit such testing, except that such testing may not be 

required more than 8 hours after the casualty occurs. 

§ 2304 Duty to provide assistance at sea 

(a) (1)A master or individual in charge of a vessel shall render assistance to any 

individual found at sea in danger of being lost, so far as the master or 

individual in charge can do so without serious danger to the master’s or 

individual’s vessel or individuals on board. 

(2) Paragraph (1) does not apply to a vessel of war or a vessel owned by the 

United States Government appropriated only to a public service. 

(b) A master or individual violating this section shall be fined not more than 

$1,000, imprisoned for not more than 2 years, or both. 

§ 2305 Injunctions 

(a) The district courts of the United States have jurisdiction to enjoin the 

negligent operation of vessels prohibited by this chapter on the petition of the 

Attorney General for the United States Government. 

(b) When practicable, the Secretary shall— 

(1) give notice to any person against whom an action for injunctive relief is 

considered under this section an opportunity to present that person’s views; 

and 

(2) except for a knowing and willful violation, give the person a reasonable 

opportunity to achieve compliance. 

(c) The failure to give notice and opportunity to present views under subsection 

(b) of this section does not preclude the court from granting appropriate relief. 

§ 2306 Vessel reporting requirements 

(a) (1) An owner, charterer, managing operator, or agent of a vessel of the 

United States, having reason to believe (because of lack of communication 

with or nonappearance of a vessel or any other incident) that the vessel may 

have been lost or imperiled, immediately shall— 

(A) notify the Coast Guard; and 
161

(B) use all available means to determine the status of the vessel. 

(2) When more than 48 hours have passed since the owner, charterer, 

managing operator, or agent of a vessel required to report to the United 

States Flag Merchant Vessel Location Filing System under authority of 

section 50113 of this title has received a communication from the vessel, the 

owner, charterer, managing operator, or agent immediately shall— 

(A) notify the Coast Guard; and 

(B) use all available means to determine the status of the vessel. 

(3) A person notifying the Coast Guard under paragraph (1) or (2) of this 

subsection shall provide the name and identification number of the vessel, 

the names of individuals on board, and other information that may be 

requested by the Coast Guard. The owner, charterer, managing operator, or 

agent also shall submit written confirmation to the Coast Guard 24 hours 

after nonwritten notification to the Coast Guard under those paragraphs. 

(4) An owner, charterer, managing operator, or agent violating this 

subsection is liable to the United States Government for a civil penalty of 

not more than $5,000 for each day during which the violation occurs. 

(b) (1) The master of a vessel of the United States required to report to the 

System shall report to the owner, charterer, managing operator, or agent at 

least once every 48 hours. 

(2) A master violating this subsection is liable to the Government for a civil 

penalty of not more than $1,000 for each day during which the violation 

occurs. 

(c) The Secretary may prescribe regulations to carry out this section. 

§ 2307 Limitation of liability for Coast Guard Vessel Traffic Service pilots 

(a) COAST GUARD VESSEL TRAFFIC SERVICE PILOTS - Any pilot, acting in the 

course and scope of his or her duties while at a United States Coast Guard Vessel 

Traffic Service, who provides information, advice, or communication assistance 

while under the supervision of a Coast Guard officer, member, or employee shall 

not be liable for damages caused by or related to such assistance unless the acts or 

omissions of such pilot constitute gross negligence or willful misconduct. 

(b)NON-FEDERAL VESSEL TRAFFIC SERVICE OPERATORS – An entity 

operating a non-Federal vessel traffic information service or advisory service 

pursuant to a duly executed written agreement with the Coast Guard, and any pilot 

acting on behalf of such entity, is not liable for damages caused by or related to 

information, advice, or communication assistance provided by such entity or pilot 

while so operating or acting unless the acts or omissions of such entity or pilot 

constitute gross negligence or willful misconduct. 
162

VESSEL BRIDGE-TO-BRIDGE 

RADIOTELEPHONE REGULATIONS 

33 CFR 26 

Sec. 

26.01 Purpose. 

26.02 Definitions.

26.03 Radiotelephone required. 

26.04 Use of the designated 

frequency. 

26.05 Use of radiotelephone.

26.06 Maintenance of 

radiotelephone; failure of 

radiotelephone. 

26.07 Communications.

26.08 Exemption procedures.

26.09 List of exemptions.

§ 26.01 Purpose. 

(a) The purpose of this part is to implement the provisions of the Vessel Bridgeto-Bridge Radiotelephone Act. This part: 

(1) Requires the use of the vessel bridge-to-bridge radiotelephone; 

(2) Provides the Coast Guard’s interpretation of the meaning of important 

terms in the Act; 

(3) Prescribes the procedures for applying for an exemption from the Act 

and the regulations issued under the Act and a listing of exemptions. 

(b) Nothing in this part relieves any person from the obligation of complying 

with the rules of the road and the applicable pilot rules. 

§ 26.02 Definitions. 

For the purpose of this part and interpreting the Act: 

Act means the “Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act”, 

33 U.S.C. sections 1201-1208; 

Length is measured from end to end over the deck excluding sheer; 

Power-driven vessel means any vessel propelled by machinery; and 

Secretary means the Secretary of the Department in which the Coast Guard is 

operating; 

Territorial sea means all waters as defined in §2.22(a)(1) ‡ of this chapter. 

Towing vessel means any commercial vessel engaged in towing another vessel 

astern, alongside, or by pushing ahead. 

Vessel Traffic Services (VTS) means a service implemented under Part 161 of this 

chapter by the United States Coast Guard designed to improve the safety and 

efficiency of vessel traffic and to protect the environment. The VTS has the 

capability to interact with marine traffic and respond to traffic situations 

developing in the VTS area. 

 

‡ Navigable waters of the United States include the: (1) Territorial seas of the United States; (2) Internal 

waters of the United States that are subject to tidal influence; and (3) Internal waters of the United 

States not subject to tidal influence that... [may be used for interstate or foreign commerce...]. See 33 

CFR 2.
163

Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area means the geographical area encompassing 

a specific VTS area of service as described in Part 161 of this chapter. This area of 

service may be subdivided into sectors for the purpose of allocating responsibility 

to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to identify different operating requirements. 

NOTE: Although regulatory jurisdiction is limited to the navigable waters of the United 

States, certain vessels will be encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry, 

to report beyond this area to facilitate traffic management within the VTS area. 

(Rule 1, International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 (as rectified); EO 

11964 (14 U.S.C. 2); 49 CFR 1.46(b)) 

§ 26.03 Radiotelephone required. 

(a) Unless an exemption is granted under §26.09 and except as provided in 

paragraph (a)(4) of this section, this part applies to: 

(1) Every power-driven vessel of 20 meters or over in length while 

navigating; 

(2) Every vessel of 100 gross tons and upward carrying one or more 

passengers for hire while navigating; 

(3) Every towing vessel of 26 feet or over in length while navigating; and 

(4) Every dredge and floating plant engaged in or near a channel or fairway 

in operations likely to restrict or affect navigation of other vessels except for 

an unmanned or intermittently manned floating plant under the control of a 

dredge. 

(b) Every vessel, dredge, or floating plant described in paragraph (a) of this 

section must have a radiotelephone on board capable of operation from its 

navigational bridge, or in the case of a dredge, from its main control station, and 

capable of transmitting and receiving on the frequency or frequencies within the 

156-162 Mega-Hertz band using the classes of emissions designated by the Federal 

Communications Commission for the exchange of navigational information.

 

(c) The radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this section must be carried 

on board the described vessels, dredges, and floating plants upon the navigable 

waters of the United States. 

(d) The radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this section must be capable 

of transmitting and receiving on VHF FM channel 22A (157.1 MHz). 

(e) While transiting any of the following waters, each vessel described in 

paragraph (a) of this section also must have on board a radiotelephone capable of 

transmitting and receiving on VHF FM channel 67 (156.375 MHz): 

(1) The lower Mississippi River from the territorial sea boundary, and within 

either the Southwest Pass safety fairway or the South Pass safety fairway 

specified in 33 CFR 166.200, to mile 242.4 AHP (Above Head of Passes) 

near Baton Rouge; 

 
164

VESSEL BRIDGE-TO-BRIDGE 

RADIOTELEPHONE—CONTINUED 

(2) The Mississippi River-Gulf Outlet from the territorial sea boundary, and 

within the Mississippi River-Gulf Outlet Safety Fairway specified in 33 CFR 

166.200, to that channel’s junction with the Inner Harbor Navigation Canal; 

and 

(3) The full length of the Inner Harbor Navigation Canal from its junction 

with the Mississippi River to that canal’s entry to Lake Pontchartrain at the 

New Seabrook vehicular bridge. 

(f) In addition to the radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this section, 

each vessel described in paragraph (a) of this section while transiting any waters 

within a Vessel Traffic Service Area, must have on board a radiotelephone capable 

of transmitting and receiving on the VTS designated frequency in Table 161.12(c) 

(VTS and VMRS Center, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and 

Monitoring Areas). 

NOTE: A single VHF FM radio capable of scanning or sequential monitoring (often 

referred to as “dual watch” capability) will not meet the requirements for two radios. 

§ 26.04 Use of the designated frequency. 

(a) No person may use the frequency designated by the Federal 

Communications Commission under section 8 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 1207(a), to 

transmit any information other than information necessary for the safe navigation 

of vessels or necessary tests. 

(b) Each person who is required to maintain a listening watch under section 5 

of the Act shall, when necessary, transmit and confirm, on the designated 

frequency, the intentions of his vessel and any other information necessary for the 

safe navigation of vessels. 

(c) Nothing in these regulations may be construed as prohibiting the use of the 

designated frequency to communicate with shore stations to obtain or furnish 

information necessary for the safe navigation of vessels. 

(d) On the navigable waters of the United States, channel 13 (156.65 MHz) is 

the designated frequency required to be monitored in accordance with §26.05(a) 

except that in the area prescribed in §26.03(e), channel 67 (156.375 MHz) is an 

additional frequency. 

(e) On those navigable waters of the United States within a VTS area, the 

designated VTS frequency is the designated frequency required to be monitored ‡

in accordance with §26.05. 

 

 

‡ Per 47 CFR 80.148(b), a VHF watch on Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject 

to the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating in a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) 

system when the watch is maintained on both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a designated 

VTS frequency.
165

§ 26.05 Use of Radiotelephone. 

Section 5 of the Act states that the radiotelephone required by this Act is for the 

exclusive use of the master or person in charge of the vessel, or the person 

designated by the master or person in charge to pilot or direct the movement of 

the vessel, who shall maintain a listening watch on the designated frequency. 

Nothing herein shall be interpreted as precluding the use of portable 

radiotelephone equipment to satisfy the requirements of this Act. 

§ 26.06 Maintenance of radiotelephone; failure of radiotelephone. 

Section 6 of the Act states: 

(a) Whenever radiotelephone capability is required by this Act, a vessel’s 

radiotelephone equipment shall be maintained in effective operating condition. If 

the radiotelephone equipment carried aboard a vessel ceases to operate, the master 

shall exercise due diligence to restore it or cause it to be restored to effective 

operating condition at the earliest practicable time. The failure of a vessel’s 

radiotelephone equipment shall not, in itself, constitute a violation of this Act, nor 

shall it obligate the master of any vessel to moor or anchor his vessel; however, 

the loss of radiotelephone capability shall be given consideration in the navigation 

of the vessel. 

§ 26.07 Communications. 

No person may use the services of, and no person may serve as, a person 

required to maintain a listening watch under section 5 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 1204, 

unless the person can communicate in the English language. 

§ 26.08 Exemption procedures. 

(a) The Commandant has redelegated to the Assistant Commandant for Marine 

Safety, Security and Environmental Protection, U.S. Coast Guard Headquarters, 

with the reservation that this authority shall not be further redelegated, the 

authority to grant exemptions from provisions of the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge 

Radiotelephone Act and this part. 

(b) Any person may petition for an exemption from any provision of the Act or 

this part; 

(c) Each petition must be submitted in writing to Commandant (CG-DCO-D), 

Attn: Deputy for Operations Policy and Capabilities, U.S. Coast Guard Stop 7318, 

2703 Martin Luther King Jr. Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20593-7318, and must 

state: 

(1) The provisions of the Act or this part from which an exemption is 

requested; and 

(2) The reasons why marine navigation will not be adversely affected if the 

exemption is granted and if the exemption relates to a local communication 

system how that system would fully comply with the intent of the concept 

of the Act but would not conform in detail if the exemption is granted. 

 
166

VESSEL BRIDGE-TO-BRIDGE 

RADIOTELEPHONE—CONTINUED 

§ 26.09 List of Exemptions. 

(a) All vessels navigating on those waters governed by the navigation rules for 

the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters (33 U.S.C. 241 et seq.) 

are exempt from the requirements of the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone 

Act and this part until May 6, 1975. 

(b) Each vessel navigating on the Great Lakes as defined in the Inland 

Navigation Rules Act of 1980 (33 U.S.C. 2001 et seq.) and to which the Vessel 

Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act (33 U.S.C. 1201-1208) applies is exempt 

from the requirements in 33 U.S.C. 1203, 1204, and 1205 and the regulations under 

§§ 26.03, 26.04, 26.05, 26.06, and 26.07. Each of these vessels and each person to 

whom 33 U.S.C. 1208(a) applies must comply with Articles VII, X, Xl, XII, XIII, 

XV, and XVI and Technical Regulations 1-9 of “The Agreement Between the 

United States of America and Canada for Promotion of Safety on the Great Lakes 

by Means of Radio, 1973.” 

 
167

VESSEL TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 

33 CFR 161 

Sec. 

Subpart A – Vessel Traffic Services 

GENERAL RULES

161.1 Purpose and Intent. 

161.2 Definitions. 

161.3 Applicability. 

161.4 Requirement to carry the rules. 

161.5 Deviations from the rules. 

161.6 Preemption. 

SERVICES, VTS MEASURES, AND OPERATING 

REQUIREMENTS

161.10 Services. 

161.11 VTS measures. 

161.12 Vessel operating requirements. 

161.13 VTS Special Area operating requirements. 

Subpart B – Vessel Movement Reporting 

System 

161.15 Purpose and intent. 

161.16 Applicability. 

161.17 Definitions. 

161.18 Reporting requirements.

161.19 Sailing Plan (SP).

161.20 Position Report (PR).

161.21 Automated reporting. 

161.22 Final Report (FR). 

161.23 Reporting exemptions.

Subpart C - Vessel Traffic Service and Vessel 

Movement Reporting System Areas and 

Reporting Points 

161.25 Vessel Traffic Service New York Area.

161.30 Vessel Traffic Service Louisville.

161.35 Vessel Traffic Service 

Houston/Galveston.

161.40 Vessel Traffic Service Berwick Bay.

161.45 Vessel Traffic Service St. Marys River.

161.50 Vessel Traffic Service San Francisco.

161.55 Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound and 

the Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service for 

the Juan de Fuca Region.

161.60 Vessel Traffic Service Prince William 

Sound.

161.65 Vessel Traffic Service Lower Mississippi 

River.

161.70 Vessel Traffic Service Port Arthur.

Subpart A – Vessel Traffic Services 

GENERAL RULES

§ 161.1 Purpose and Intent. 

(a) The purpose of this part is to promulgate regulations implementing and enforcing 

certain sections of the Ports and Waterways Safety Act (PWSA) setting up a national 

system of Vessel Traffic Services that will enhance navigation, vessel safety, and marine 

environmental protection, and promote safe vessel movement by reducing the potential 

for collisions, rammings, and groundings, and the loss of lives and property associated 

with these incidents within VTS areas established hereunder. 

(b) Vessel Traffic Services provide the mariner with information related to the safe 

navigation of a waterway. This information, coupled with the mariner's compliance with 

the provisions set forth in this part, enhances the safe routing of vessels through congested 

waterways or waterways of particular hazard. Under certain circumstances, a VTS may 

issue directions to control the movement of vessels in order to minimize the risk of 

collision between vessels, or damage to property or the environment. 

(c) The owner, operator, charterer, master, or person directing the movement of a vessel 

remains at all times responsible for the manner in which the vessel is operated and 

maneuvered, and is responsible for the safe navigation of the vessel under all 
168 

circumstances. Compliance with these rules or with a direction of the VTS is at all times 

contingent upon the exigencies of safe navigation. 

(d) Nothing in this part is intended to relieve any vessel, owner, operator, charterer, 

master, or person directing the movement of a vessel from the consequences of any 

neglect to comply with this part or any other applicable law or regulation (e.g., the 

International Regulations for Prevention of Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) or the 

Inland Navigation Rules) or of the neglect of any precaution which may be required by 

the ordinary practice of seamen, or by the special circumstances of the case. 

§ 161.2 Definitions. 

For the purposes of this part: 

Cooperative Vessel Traffic Services (CVTS) means the system of vessel traffic management 

established and jointly operated by the United States and Canada within adjoining waters. 

In addition, CVTS facilitates traffic movement and anchorages, avoids jurisdictional 

disputes, and renders assistance in emergencies in adjoining United States and Canadian 

waters. 

Hazardous Vessel Operating Condition means any condition related to a vessel's ability to 

safely navigate or maneuver, and includes, but is not limited to: 

(1) The absence or malfunction of vessel operating equipment, such as propulsion 

machinery, steering gear, radar system, gyrocompass, depth sounding device, automatic 

radar plotting aid (ARPA), radiotelephone, Automatic Identification System 

equipment, navigational lighting, sound signaling devices or similar equipment. 

(2) Any condition on board the vessel likely to impair navigation, such as lack of 

current nautical charts and publications, personnel shortage, or similar condition. 

(3) Vessel characteristics that affect or restrict maneuverability, such as cargo or tow 

arrangement, trim, loaded condition, underkeel or overhead clearance, speed 

capabilities, power availability, or similar characteristics, which may affect the positive 

control or safe handling of the vessel or the tow. 

Navigable waters means all navigable waters of the United States including the territorial 

sea of the United States, extending to 12 nautical miles from United States baselines, as 

described in Presidential Proclamation No. 5928 of December 27, 1988. 

Precautionary Area means a routing measure comprising an area within defined limits 

where vessels must navigate with particular caution and within which the direction of 

traffic may be recommended. 

Towing Vessel means any commercial vessel engaged in towing another vessel astern, 

alongside, or by pushing ahead. 

Vessel Movement Center (VMC) means the shore-based facility that operates the vessel 

tracking system for a Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) area or sector within 

such an area. The VMC does not necessarily have the capability or qualified personnel to 

interact with marine traffic, nor does it necessarily respond to traffic situations developing 

in the area, as does a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS). 

Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) means a mandatory reporting system used to 

monitor and track vessel movements. This is accomplished by a vessel providing 

information under established procedures as set forth in this part in the areas defined in 

Table 161.12(c) (VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and 

Monitoring Areas). 
169 

Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) User means a vessel, or an owner, operator, 

charterer, Master, or person directing the movement of a vessel that is required to 

participate in a VMRS. 

Vessel Traffic Center (VTC) means the shore-based facility that operates the vessel traffic 

service for the Vessel Traffic Service area or sector within such an area. 

Vessel Traffic Services (VTS) means a service implemented by the United States Coast 

Guard designed to improve the safety and efficiency of vessel traffic and to protect the 

environment. The VTS has the capability to interact with marine traffic and respond to 

traffic situations developing in the VTS area. 

Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area means the geographical area encompassing a 

specific VTS area of service. This area of service may be subdivided into sectors for the 

purpose of allocating responsibility to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to identify 

different operating requirements. 

NOTE: Although regulatory jurisdiction is limited to the navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels 

will be encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry, to report beyond this area to facilitate traffic 

management within the VTS area. 

VTS Special Area means a waterway within a VTS area in which special operating 

requirements apply. 

VTS User means a vessel, or an owner, operator, charterer, master, or person directing 

the movement of a vessel, that is: 

(a) Subject to the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act; or 

(b) Required to participate in a VMRS within a VTS area (VMRS User). 

VTS User's Manual means the manual established and distributed by the VTS to 

provide the mariner with a description of the services offered and rules in force for that 

VTS. Additionally, the manual may include chartlets showing the area and sector 

boundaries, general navigational information about the area, and procedures, radio 

frequencies, reporting provisions and other information which may assist the mariner 

while in the VTS area. 

§ 161.3 Applicability. 

The provisions of this subpart shall apply to each VTS User and may also apply to any 

vessel while underway or at anchor on the navigable waters of the United States within a 

VTS area, to the extent the VTS considers necessary. 

§ 161.4 Requirement to carry the rules. 

Each VTS User shall carry on board and maintain for ready reference a copy of these 

rules. 

NOTE: These rules are contained in the applicable U.S. Coast Pilot, the VTS User's Manual which may be 

obtained by contacting the appropriate VTS, and periodically published in the Local Notice to Mariners. The 

VTS User's Manual and the World VTS Guide, an International Maritime Organization (IMO) recognized 

publication, contain additional information which may assist the prudent mariner while in the appropriate VTS 

area. 

 § 161.5 Deviations from the rules. 

(a) Requests to deviate from any provision in this part, either for an extended period 

of time or if anticipated before the start of a transit, must be submitted in writing to the 

appropriate District Commander. Upon receipt of the written request, the District 

Commander may authorize a deviation if it is determined that such a deviation provides a 

level of safety equivalent to that provided by the required measure or is a maneuver 
170 

considered necessary for safe navigation under the circumstances. An application for an 

authorized deviation must state the need and fully describe the proposed alternative to the 

required measure. 

(b) Requests to deviate from any provision in this part due to circumstances that 

develop during a transit or immediately preceding a transit, may be made verbally to the 

appropriate VTS Director. Requests to deviate shall be made as far in advance as 

practicable. Upon receipt of the request, the VTS Director may authorize a deviation if it 

is determined that, based on vessel handling characteristics, traffic density, radar contacts, 

environmental conditions and other relevant information, such a deviation provides a level 

of safety equivalent to that provided by the required measure or is a maneuver considered 

necessary for safe navigation under the circumstances. 

§ 161.6 Preemption. 

The regulations in this part have preemptive impact over State laws or regulations on 

the same subject matter. The Coast Guard has determined, after considering the factors 

developed by the Supreme Court in U.S. v. Locke, 529 U.S. 89 (2000), that by enacting 

Chapter 25 of the Ports and Waterways Safety Act (33 U.S.C. 1221 et seq.), Congress 

intended that Coast Guard regulations preempt State laws or regulations regarding vessel 

traffic services in United States ports and waterways. 

SERVICES, VTS MEASURES, AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

§ 161.10 Services. 

To enhance navigation and vessel safety, and to protect the marine environment, a 

VTS may issue advisories, or respond to vessel requests for information, on reported 

conditions within the VTS area, such as: 

(a) Hazardous conditions or circumstances; 

(b) Vessel congestion; 

(c) Traffic density; 

(d) Environmental conditions; 

(e) Aids to navigation status; 

(f) Anticipated vessel encounters; 

(g) Another vessel's name, type, position, hazardous vessel operating conditions, if 

applicable, and intended navigation movements, as reported; 

(h) Temporary measures in effect; 

(i) A description of local harbor operations and conditions, such as ferry routes, 

dredging, and so forth; 

(j) Anchorage availability; or 

(k) Other information or special circumstances 

§ 161.11 VTS measures. 

(a) A VTS may issue measures or directions to enhance navigation and vessel safety 

and to protect the marine environment, such as, but not limited to: 

(1) Designating temporary reporting points and procedures; 

(2) Imposing vessel operating requirements; or 

(3) Establishing vessel traffic routing schemes. 

(b) During conditions of vessel congestion, restricted visibility, adverse weather, or 

other hazardous circumstances, a VTS may control, supervise, or otherwise manage traffic, 

by specifying times of entry, movement, or departure to, from, or within a VTS area. 
171 

§ 161.12 Vessel operating requirements. 

(a) Subject to the exigencies of safe navigation, a VTS User shall comply with all 

measures established or directions issued by a VTS. 

(b) If, in a specific circumstance, a VTS User is unable to safely comply with a measure 

or direction issued by the VTS, the VTS User may deviate only to the extent necessary to 

avoid endangering persons, property or the environment. The deviation shall be reported 

to the VTS as soon as is practicable. 

(c) When not exchanging voice communications, a VTS User must maintain a listening 

watch as required by § 26.04(e) of this chapter on the VTS frequency designated in Table 

161.12(c) (VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and 

Monitoring Areas). In addition, the VTS User must respond promptly when hailed and 

communicate in the English language. 

NOTE TO § 161.12(c): As stated in 47 CFR 80.148(b), a very high frequency watch on Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) 

is not required on vessels subject to the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating in a Vessel 

Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is maintained on both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a 

designated VTS frequency. 

(d) As soon as is practicable, a VTS User shall notify the VTS of any of the following: 

(1) A marine casualty as defined in 46 CFR 4.05-1; 

(2) Involvement in the ramming of a fixed or floating object; 

(3) A pollution incident as defined in § 151.15 of this chapter; 

(4) A defect or discrepancy in an aid to navigation; 

(5) A hazardous condition as defined in § 160.204 of this chapter 

(6) Improper operation of vessel equipment required by part 164 of this chapter; 

(7) A situation involving hazardous materials for which a report is required by 49 

CFR 176.48; and 

(8) A hazardous vessel operating condition as defined in § 161.2. 

§ 161.13 VTS Special Area operating requirements. 

The following operating requirements apply within a VTS Special Area: 

(a) A VTS User shall, if towing astern, do so with as short a hawser as safety and good 

seamanship permits. 

(b) A VMRS User shall: 

(1) Not enter or get underway in the area without prior approval of the VTS; 

(2) Not enter a VTS Special Area if a hazardous vessel operating condition or 

circumstance exists; 

(3) Not meet, cross, or overtake any other VMRS User in the area without prior 

approval of the VTS; and 

(4) Before meeting, crossing, or overtaking any other VMRS User in the area, 

communicate on the designated vessel bridge-to-bridge radiotelephone frequency, 

intended navigation movements, and any other information necessary in order to 

make safe passing arrangements. This requirement does not relieve a vessel of any 

duty prescribed by the International Regulations for Prevention of Collisions at 

Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) or the Inland Navigation Rules. 
172 

Subpart B—Vessel Movement Reporting System 

§ 161.15 Purpose and intent. 

(a) A Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) is a system used to monitor and 

track vessel movements within a VTS or VMRS area. This is accomplished by requiring 

that vessels provide information under established procedures as set forth in this part, or 

as directed by the Center. 

(b) To avoid imposing an undue reporting burden or unduly congesting radiotelephone 

frequencies, reports shall be limited to information which is essential to achieve the 

objectives of the VMRS. These reports are consolidated into three reports (sailing plan, 

position, and final). 

§ 161.16 Applicability. 

Unless otherwise stated, the provisions of this subpart apply to the following vessels 

and VMRS Users: 

(a) Every power-driven vessel of 40 meters (approximately 131 feet) or more in length, 

while navigating; 

(b) Every towing vessel of 8 meters (approximately 26 feet) or more in length, while 

navigating; or 

(c) Every vessel certificated to carry 50 or more passengers for hire, when engaged in 

trade. 

§ 161.17 Definitions. 

As used in this subpart: 

Center means a Vessel Traffic Center or Vessel Movement Center. 

Published means available in a widely-distributed and publicly available medium (e.g., 

VTS User's Manual, ferry schedule, Notice to Mariners). 

§ 161.18 Reporting requirements. 

(a) A Center may: 

(1) Direct a vessel to provide any of the information set forth in Table 161.18(a) 

(IMO Standard Ship Reporting System); 

(2) Establish other means of reporting for those vessels unable to report on the 

designated frequency; or 

(3) Require reports from a vessel in sufficient time to allow advance vessel traffic 

planning. 

(b) All reports required by this part shall be made as soon as is practicable on the 

frequency designated in Table 161.12(c) (VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, 

Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring Areas). 

(c) When not exchanging communications, a VMRS User must maintain a listening 

watch as described in § 26.04(e) of this chapter on the frequency designated in Table 

161.12(c) (VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and 

Monitoring Areas). In addition, the VMRS User must respond promptly when hailed and 

communicate in the English language. 
173 

TABLE 161.18(a)—THE IMO STANDARD SHIP REPORTING SYSTEM

A ALPHA Ship Name, call sign or ship station identity, and flag. 

B BRAVO Dates and time of 

event 

A 6 digit group giving day of month (first two digits), hours and minutes (last four digits). 

If other than UTC state time zone used. 

C CHARLIE Position A 4 digit group giving latitude in degrees and minutes suffixed with N (north) or S (south) 

and a 5 digit group giving longitude in degrees and minutes suffixed with E (east) or W 

(west); or 

D DELTA Position True bearing (first 3 digits) and distance (state distance) in nautical miles from a clearly 

identified landmark (state landmark). 

E ECHO True course A 3 digit group. 

F FOXTROT Speed in knots and 

tenths of knots 

A 3 digit group. 

G GOLF Port of Departure Name of last port of call. 

H HOTEL Date, time and point 

of entry system 

Entry time expressed as in (B) and into the entry position expressed as in (C) or (D). 

I INDIA Destination and 

expected time of 

arrival 

Name of port and date time group expressed as in (B). 

J JULIET Pilot State whether a deep sea or local pilot is on board. 

K KILO Date, time and point 

of exit from system 

Exit time expressed as in (B) and exit position expressed as in (C) or (D). 

L LIMA Route information Intended track.

M MIKE Radio State in full names of communications stations/frequencies guarded. 

N NOVEMBER Time of next report Date time group expressed as in (B). 

O OSCAR Maximum present 

static draught in 

meters 

4 digit group giving meters and centimeters. 

P PAPA Cargo on board Cargo and brief details of any dangerous cargoes as well as harmful substances and gases 

that could endanger persons or the environment. 

Q QUEBEC Defects, damage, 

deficiencies or 

limitations 

Brief detail of defects, damage, deficiencies or other limitations.

R ROMEO Description of 

pollution or 

dangerous goods lost

Brief details of type of pollution (oil, chemicals, etc.) or dangerous goods lost overboard; 

position expressed as in (C) or (D). 

S SIERRA Weather conditions Brief details of weather and sea conditions prevailing. 

T TANGO Ship's representative 

and/or owner 

Details of name and particulars of ship's representative and/or owner for provision of 

information. 

U UNIFORM Ship size and type Details of length, breadth, tonnage, and type, etc., as required. 

V VICTOR Medical personnel Doctor, physician's assistant, nurse, no medic. 

W WHISKEY Total number of 

persons on board 

State number. 

X XRAY Miscellaneous Any other information as appropriate. [i.e., a detailed description of a planned operation, 

which may include: its duration; effective area; any restrictions to navigation; notification 

procedures for approaching vessels; in addition, for a towing operation: configuration, 

length of the tow, available horsepower, etc.; for a dredge or floating plant: configuration 

of pipeline, mooring configuration, number of assist vessels, etc.]. 
174 

NOTE: As stated in 47 CFR 80.148(b), a VHF watch on Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is not required on vessels 

subject to the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating in a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) 

system when the watch is maintained on both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a designated VTS 

frequency. 

 (d) A vessel must report: 

(1) Any significant deviation from its Sailing Plan, as defined in § 161.19, or from previously 

reported information; or 

(2) Any intention to deviate from a VTS issued measure or vessel traffic routing system. 

 (e) When reports required by this part include time information, such information shall be given 

using the local time zone in effect and the 24-hour military clock system. 

§ 161.19 Sailing Plan (SP). 

Unless otherwise stated, at least 15 minutes before navigating a VTS area, a vessel must report 

the: 

(a) Vessel name and type; 

(b) Position; 

(c) Destination and ETA; 

(d) Intended route; 

(e) Time and point of entry; and 

(f) Certain dangerous cargo on board or in its tow, as defined in §160.204 of this subchapter. 

§ 161.20 Position Report (PR). 

A vessel must report its name and position: 

(a) Upon point of entry into a VMRS area; 

(b) At designated reporting points as set forth in subpart C; or 

(c) When directed by the Center. 

§ 161.21 Automated reporting. 

(a) Unless otherwise directed, vessels equipped with an Automatic Identification System (AIS) 

are required to make continuous, all stations, AIS broadcasts, in lieu of voice Position Reports, to 

those Centers denoted in Table 161.12(c) of this part. 

(b) Should an AIS become non-operational, while or prior to navigating a VMRS area, it should 

be restored to operating condition as soon as possible, and, until restored a vessel must: 

(1) Notify the Center; 

(2) Make voice radio Position Reports at designated reporting points as required by § 

161.20(b) of this part; and 

(3) Make any other reports as directed by the Center. 

§ 161.22 Final Report (FR). 

A vessel must report its name and position: 

(a) On arrival at its destination; or 

(b) When leaving a VTS area 

§ 161.23 Reporting exemptions. 

(a) Unless otherwise directed, the following vessels are exempted from providing Position and 

Final Reports due to the nature of their operation: 

(1) Vessels on a published schedule and route; 

(2) Vessels operating within an area of a radius of three nautical miles or less; or 

(3) Vessels escorting another vessel or assisting another vessel in maneuvering procedures. 
175 

(b) A vessel described in paragraph (a) of this section must: 

(1) Provide a Sailing Plan at least 5 minutes but not more than 15 minutes before 

navigating within the VMRS area; and 

(2) If it departs from its promulgated schedule by more than 15 minutes or changes 

its limited operating area, make the established VMRS reports, or report as directed. 

Subpart C—Vessel Traffic Service and Vessel Movement Reporting System 

Areas and Reporting Points 

NOTE: All geographic coordinates contained in part 161 (latitude and longitude) are expressed in North 

American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83).

§ 161.25 Vessel Traffic Service New York Area. 

The area consists of the navigable waters of the Lower New York Harbor bounded on 

the east by a line drawn from Norton Point to Breezy Point; on the south by a line 

connecting the entrance buoys at the Ambrose Channel, Swash Channel, and Sandy Hook 

Channel to Sandy Hook Point; and on the southeast including the waters of Sandy Hook 

Bay south to a line drawn at latitude 40°25′ N.; then west into waters of the Raritan Bay 

to the Raritan River Rail Road Bridge; and then north including the waters of the Arthur 

Kill and Newark Bay to the Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge at latitude 40°41.9′ N.; and then 

east including the waters of the Kill Van Kull and Upper New York Bay north to a line 

drawn east-west from the Holland Tunnel Ventilator Shaft at latitude 40°43.7′ N., 

longitude 74°01.6′ W. in the Hudson River; and then continuing east including the waters 

of the East River to the Throgs Neck Bridge, excluding the Harlem River. 

NOTE: Although mandatory participation in VTSNY is limited to the area within the navigable waters of the 

United States, VTSNY will provide services beyond those waters. Prospective users are encouraged to report 

beyond the area of required participation in order to facilitate advance vessel traffic management in the VTS area 

and to receive VTSNY advisories and/or assistance. 

§ 161.30 Vessel Traffic Service Louisville. 

The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the Ohio River between McAlpine 

Locks (Mile 606.8) and Twelve Mile Island (Mile 593), only when the McAlpine upper 

pool gauge is at 13.0 feet or above. 

§ 161.35 Vessel Traffic Service Houston/Galveston. 

(a) The VTS area consists of the following major waterways and portions of connecting 

waterways: Galveston Bay Entrance Channel; Outer Bar Channel; Inner Bar Channel; 

Bolivar Roads Channel; Galveston Channel; Gulf ICW and Galveston-Freeport Cut-Off 

from Mile 346 to Mile 352; Texas City Channel; Texas City Turning Basin; Texas City 

Canal Channel; Texas City Canal Turning Basin; Houston Ship Channel; Bayport Channel; 

Bayport Turning Basin; Houston Turning Basin; and the following precautionary areas 

associated with these waterways. 

 
176 

(b) Precautionary areas. 

TABLE 161.35(b)—VTS HOUSTON/GALVESTON PRECAUTIONARY AREAS

Precautionary area name Radius (yds.) 

Center point 

Latitude Longitude 

Bolivar Roads 4000 29°20.9′ N 94°47.0′ W 

Red Fish Bar 4000 29°29.8′ N 94°51.9′ W 

Bayport Channel 4000 29°36.7′ N 94°57.2′ W 

Morgans Point 2000 29°41.0′ N 94°59.0′ W 

Upper San Jacinto Bay 1000 29°42.3′ N 95°01.1′ W 

Baytown 1000 29°43.6′ N 95°01.4′ W 

Lynchburg 1000 29°45.8′ N 95°04.8′ W

Carpenters Bayou 1000 29°45.3′ N 95°05.6′ W 

Jacintoport 1000 29°44.8′ N 95°06.0′ W 

Greens Bayou 1000 29°44.8′ N 95°10.2′ W 

Hunting Bayou 1000 29°44.3′ N 95°12.1′ W 

Sims Bayou 1000 29°43.2′ N 95°14.4′ W 

Brady Island 1000 29°43.5′ N 95°16.4′ W 

Buffalo Bayou 1000 29°45.0′ N 95°17.3′ W 

Note: Each Precautionary Area encompasses a circular area of the radius denoted. 
177 

(c) Reporting points. 

TABLE 161.35(c)—VTS HOUSTON/GALVESTON REPORTING POINTS

Designator Geographic name Geographic description 

Latitude/ 

longitude Notes 

1 Galveston Bay Entrance 

Channel 

Galveston Bay Entrance CH 

Lighted Buoy (LB) “1C” 

29°18.2′ N; 

94°37.6′ W 

2 Galveston Bay Entrance 

Channel 

Galveston Bay Entrance Channel 

LB 11 and 12 

29°20.6′ N; 

94°44.6′ W 

E Bolivar Land Cut Mile 349 Intracoastal Waterway 

(ICW) 

29°22.5′ N; 

94°46.9′ W 

Tows entering HSC also report 

at HSC LB 25 & 26. 

W Pelican Cut Mile 351 ICW 29°21.4′ N; 

94°48.5′ W 

Tows entering HSC also report 

at HSC LB 25 & 26. 

G Galveston Harbor Galveston Channel Lt. 2 29°20.2′ N; 

94°46.6′ W 

Coast Guard Base. 

T Texas City Channel Texas City Channel Lt. 12 29°22.4′ N; 

94°50.9′ W 

X Houston Ship Channel ICW 

Intersection 

Houston Ship Channel (HSC) LB 

25 and 26 

29°22.2′ N; 

94°48.1′ W 

Tow entering HSC from ICW 

or Texas Cut Only. 

3 Lower Galveston Bay HSC Lt. 31 and LB 32 29°23.8′ N; 

94°48.9′ W 

4 Red Fish Bar HSC Lt. 53 & 54 29°30.3′ N; 

94°52.4′ W 

P Bayport Ship Channel Bayport Ship Channel Lt. 8 and 9 29°36.8′ N; 

94°59.5′ W 

Bayport Land Cut. 

4A Upper Galveston Bay HSC Lt. 69 and 70 29°34.7′ N; 

94°55.8′ W 

Tows only. 

5 Morgan's Point HSC Lt. 91 29°41.0′ N; 

94°59.0′ W 

6 Exxon HSC Lt. 109A 29°43.5′ N; 

95°01.4′ W 

7 Lynchburg Ferry crossing 29°45.8′ N; 

95°04.8′ W 

8 Shell Oil Boggy Bayou 29°44.1′ N; 

95°08.0′ W 

9 Greens Bayou HSC Lt. 152 29°44.8′ N; 

95°10.1′ W 

10 Hunting Bayou Hunting Bayou Turning Basin. 29°44.4′ N; 

95°12.1′ W 

11 Lyondell Sims Bayou Turning Basin. 29°43.2′ N; 

95°14.4′ W 

12 I-610 Bridge I-610 Bridge 29°43.5′ N; 

95°16.0′ W 

13 Buffalo Bayou Houston Turning Basin 29°45.0′ N; 

95°17.4′ W 
178 

§ 161.40 Vessel Traffic Service Berwick Bay. 

(a) The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the following segments of 

waterways: the Intracoastal Waterway (ICW) Morgan City to Port Allen Alternate Route 

from Mile Marker 0 to Mile Marker 5; the ICW from Mile Marker 93 west of Harvey Lock 

(WHL) to Mile Marker 102 WHL; the Atchafalaya River Route from Mile Marker 113 to 

Mile Marker 122; from Bayou Shaffer Junction (ICW Mile Marker 94.5 WHL) south one 

statute mile along Bayou Shaffer; and from Berwick Lock northwest one statute mile along 

the Lower Atchafalaya River. 

(b) VTS Special Area. The Berwick Bay VTS Special Area consists of those waters 

within a 1000 yard radius of the Burlington Northern/Santa Fe Railroad Bridge located at 

Mile .03 MC/PA. 

(c) Reporting Points. 

TABLE 161.40(c)—VTS BERWICK BAY REPORTING POINTS

Designator Geographic name Geographic description Latitude/longitude Notes 

1 Stouts Pass Stouts Point Light “1” Mile 113-

Atchafalaya River 

29°43′47′′ N 

91°13′25′′ W 

2 Berwick Lock Mile 1.9 MC/PA 29°43′10′′ N 

91°13′28′′ W 

If transiting the 

Lock. 

3 Conrad's Point Junction Buoy “1” Mile 1.5 MC/PA 29°42′32′′ N 

91°13′14′′ W 

4 Swift Ships Flat Lake Junction Mile 3 MC/PA 29°43′26′′ N 

91°12′22′′ W 

5 Burlington Northern/Santa Fe Railroad 

Bridge 

Mile 0.3 MC/PA 29°41′34′′ N 

91°12′44′′ W 

6 20 Grant Point Junction Bayou Boeuf-Atchafalaya R. Mile 95.5 

ICW 

29°41′18′′ N 

91°12′36′′ W 

7 ICW Overhead Power Cable Mile 96.5 ICW 29°40′43′′ N 

91°13′18′′ W 

8 Wax Bayou Junction Light “A” Mile 98.2W ICW 29°39′29′′ N 

91°14′46′′ W 

9 Shaffer Junction ICW-Bayou Shaffer Mile 94.5 ICW 29°41′10′′ N 

91°11′38′′ W 
179 

§ 161.45 Vessel Traffic Service St. Marys River. 

(a) The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the St. Marys River and lower 

Whitefish Bay from 45°57′ N. (De Tour Reef Light) to the south, to 46°38.7′ N. (Ile 

Parisienne Light) to the north, except the waters of the St. Marys Falls Canal, and to the 

east along a line from La Pointe to Sims Point, within Potagannissing Bay and Worsley 

Bay. 

(b) Reporting Points. 

TABLE 161.45(b)—VTS ST. MARYS RIVER REPORTING POINTS

Designator Geographic name Geographic description Latitude/longitude Notes

1 Ile Parisienne Ile Parisienne Light 46°37.3′ N; 84°45.9′ W Downbound Only. 

2 Gros Cap Reef Gros Cap Reefs Light 46°30.6′ N; 84°37.1′ W Upbound Only. 

3 Round Island Round Island Light 32 46°26.9′ N; 84°31.7′W. 

4 Pointe Louise Pointe Louise Light 46°27.8′ N; 84°28.2′W. 

5 West End of Locks West Center Pierhead Light 46°30.2′ N; 84°22.2′ W Upbound Only. 

6 East End of Locks East Center Pierhead Light 46°30.1′ N; 84°20.3′ W Downbound Only. 

7 Mission Point Light 99 46°29.2′ N; 84°18.1′W. 

8 Six Mile Point Six Mile Point 46°26.1′ N; 84°15.4′W. 

9 Ninemile Point Light 80 46°23.5′ N; 84°14.1′W. 

10 West Neebish Channel Light 29 46°16.9′ N; 84°12.5′ W Downbound Only. 

11 Munuscong Lake Junction Lighted Junction Buoy 46°10.8′ N; 84°05.6′W. 

12 De Tour Reef De Tour Reef Light 46°56.9′ N; 83°53.7′ W. 

§ 161.50 Vessel Traffic Service San Francisco. 

The VTS area consists of all the navigable waters of San Francisco Bay Region south 

of the Mare Island Causeway Bridge and the Petaluma River Entrance Channel Daybeacon 

19 and Petaluma River Entrance Channel Light 20 and north of the Dumbarton Bridge; 

its seaward approaches within a 38 nautical mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37° 55.8′ N., 

122° 34.6′ W.); and its navigable tributaries as far east as the port of Stockton on the San 

Joaquin River, as far north as the port of Sacramento on the Sacramento River. 
180 

§ 161.55 Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound and the Cooperative Vessel Traffic 

Service for the Juan de Fuca Region. 

The Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound area consists of the U.S. navigable waters of 

the Salish Sea from a line drawn from the Washington State coastline at 48°23.133’ N., 

124°43.616’ W. on Cape Flattery to the Cape Flattery Light at 48°23.5’ N., 124°44.2’ W. 

on Tatoosh Island, due west to the U.S. Territorial Sea Boundary; thence northward along 

the U.S. Territorial Sea Boundary to its intersection with the U.S./Canada International 

Boundary; thence east along the U.S./Canada International Boundary to 49°00.1’ N., 

122°45.3’ W. (International Boundary Range C Rear Light). 

(a) Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound participates in a U.S./Canadian Cooperative 

Vessel Traffic Service (CVTS) to jointly manage vessel traffic in the Juan de Fuca Region. 

The CVTS for the Juan de Fuca Region consists of all navigable waters of the Salish Sea, 

bounded on the northwest by 48°35.749’ N.; and on the southwest by 48°23.5’ N.; and on 

the west by the rhumb line joining 48°35.749’ N., 124°47.5’ W. with 48°23.5’ N., 

124°48.616’ W.; and on the northeast by a line drawn along 49° N. from Vancouver Island 

to Semiahmoo Bay; and on the southeast, by a line drawn from McCurdy Point on the 

Quimper Peninsula to Point Partridge on Whidbey Island. Canadian and United States 

Vessel Traffic Centers (Prince Rupert, B.C., Canada; Vancouver, B.C., Canada; and Seattle, 

WA) manage traffic within the CVTS area irrespective of the International Boundary. 

(b) VTS Special Area: The Eastern San Juan Island Archipelago VTS Special Area 

consists of all waters of the eastern San Juan Island Archipelago including: Rosario Strait 

bounded to the south by latitude 48°26.40′ N. (the center of the Precautionary Area “RB”) 

extending from Lopez Island to Fidalgo Island, and to the north by latitude 48°40.57′ N. 

(the center of the Precautionary Area “C”) extending from Orcas Island to Lummi Island; 

Guemes Channel; Bellingham Channel; Padilla Bay and southern Bellingham Bay (Samish 

Bay) south of latitude 48°38.42′N. 

NOTE: The center of precautionary area “RB” is not marked by a buoy. All precautionary areas are depicted on 

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) nautical charts. 

(c) Additional VTS Special Area Operating Requirements. The following additional 

requirements are applicable in the Eastern San Juan Island Archipelago VTS Special Area: 

(1) A vessel engaged in towing shall not impede the passage of a vessel of 40,000 

dead weight tons or more. 

(2) A vessel of less than 40,000 dead weight tons is exempt from the provision set 

forth in §161.13(b)(1) of this part. 

(3) A vessel of less than 100 meters in length is exempt from the provisions set 

forth in §161.13(b)(3) of this part. 

 
181 

(4) Approval will not be granted for: 

(i) A vessel of 100 meters or more in length to meet or overtake a vessel of 

40,000 dead weight tons or more; 

(ii) A vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more to meet or overtake a vessel of 

100 meters or more in length; 

(iii) A vessel of 100 meters or more in length to cross or operate within 2,000 

yards (except when crossing astern) of a vessel of 40,000 deadweight tons or 

more; or 

(iv) A vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more to or cross or operate within 

2,000 yards (except when crossing astern) of a vessel of 100 meters or more in 

length. 

(d) Reporting Point. Inbound vessels in the Strait of Juan de Fuca upon crossing 

124° W. 

§161.60 Vessel Traffic Service Prince William Sound. 

(a) The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the United States north of a line 

drawn from Cape Hinchinbrook Light to Schooner Rock Light, comprising that portion 

of Prince William Sound between 146°30′ W. and 147°20′ W. and includes Valdez Arm, 

Valdez Narrows and Port Valdez. 

(b) The Valdez Arm VTS Special Area consists of the waters of the Valdez Arm Traffic 

Separation Scheme (described in § 167.1703 of this chapter); the waters northeast of a line 

drawn from shoreline to shoreline through the points 60°58.04′ N, 146°46.52′ W and 

60°58.93′ N, 146°48.86′ W; and southwest of a line bearing 307° True from Tongue Point 

at 61°02.10′ N, 146°40.00′ W. 

(c) The Valdez Narrows VTS Special Area consists of those waters of Valdez Arm, 

Valdez Narrows, and Port Valdez northeast of a line bearing 307° True from Tongue 

Point at 61°02′06′′ N., 146°40′ W.; and southwest of a line bearing 307° True from 

Entrance Island Light at 61°05′06′′ N., 146°36′42′′ W. 

(d) Additional VTS Special Area Operating Requirements. The following additional 

requirements are applicable in the Valdez Narrows VTS Special Area: 

(1) No VMRS User shall proceed north of 61° N. without prior approval of the 

VTS. 

(2) For a vessel listed in paragraph (c)(3) of this section— 

(i) Approval to enter this area will not be granted to a vessel when a tank 

vessel of more than 20,000 deadweight tons is navigating therein; 

(ii) A northbound vessel shall remain south of 61° N. until the VTS has 

granted permission to proceed; and 

(iii) A southbound vessel shall remain in Port Valdez east of 146°35′ W. and 

north of 61°06′ N. until the VTS has granted permission to proceed. 

(3) Paragraph (c)(2) of this section applies to— 

(i) A vessel of 1600 gross tons or more; and 

(ii) A towing vessel of 8 meters or more in length, except for a vessel 

performing duties as an escort vessel as defined in 33 CFR Part 168. 
182 

(e) Reporting Points.

TABLE 161.60(d)—VTS PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND REPORTING POINTS

Designator Geographic name Geographic description Latitude/longitude Notes 

1A Cape Hinchinbrook Cape Hinchinbrook 60°16′18′′ N; 146°45′30′′ W Northbound Only. 

1B Schooner Rock Schooner Rock 60°18′42′′ N; 146°51′36′′ W Southbound Only. 

2A Naked Island Naked Island 60°40′00′′ N; 147°01′24′′ W Northbound Only. 

2B Naked Island Naked Island 60°40′00′′ N; 147°05′00′′ W Southbound Only. 

3A Bligh Reef Bligh Reef Light (Pilot Embark) 60°50′36′′ N; 146°57′30′′ W Northbound Only. 

3B Bligh Reef Bligh Reef Light (Pilot Disembark) 60°51′00′′ N; 147°01′24′′ W Southbound Only. 

4A Rocky Point Rocky Point 60°57′48′′ N; 146°47′30′′ W Northbound Only. 

4B Rocky Point Rocky Point 60°57′48′′ N; 146°50′00′′ W Southbound Only.

5 Entrance Island Entrance Island Light 61°05′24′′ N; 146°37′30′′ W. 

§ 161.65 Vessel Traffic Service Lower Mississippi River. 

(a) The Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) area consists of navigable waters of the Lower 

Mississippi River (LMR) below 30°38.7′ N 91°17.5′ W (Port Hudson Light at 254.5 miles 

Above Head of Passes (AHP)), the Southwest Pass, and those within a 12-nautical mile 

radius around 28°54.3′ N 89°25.7′ W (Southwest Pass Entrance Light at 20.1 miles Below 

Head of Passes). 

(b) The Algiers Point VTS Special Area consists of the navigable waters of the LMR 

bounded on the north by a line drawn from 29°57.62′ N 90°02.61′ W to 29°57.34′ N 

90°02.60′ W and on the south by a line drawn from 29°56.89′ N 90°03.72′ W to 29°56.93′ 

N 90°03.34′ W (95.0 and 93.5 miles AHP) during periods of high water—that is, when the 

Carrolton Gage reads 8.0 feet or above on a rising stage or 9.0 feet or above on a falling 

stage, or under any other water conditions the Captain of the Port (COTP) deems 

necessary. 

(c) Additional Algiers Point VTS Special Area Operating Requirements. The following 

additional requirements are applicable in the Algiers Point VTS Special Area: 

(1) A vessel movement reporting system (VMRS) user must abide by the signals of 

the Governor Nicholls Street Wharf, 29°57.6′ N 90°03.4′ W, and Gretna, 29°55.5′ 

N 90°03.7′ W, Control Lights (94.3 and 96.6 miles AHP, respectively) in the 

following manner: 

(i) Green Light—May proceed as intended. 

(ii) Red Light—Do not proceed, unless otherwise directed by the VTS. 

(iii) No Light—Do not proceed, immediately notify VTS and await further 

directions. 

NOTE TO § 161.65(c)(1): To provide advance notification to downbound vessels, a traffic repeater signal of 

Gretna Light is located at Westwego, LA, 29°54.8′ N; 90°08.3′ W (101.4 miles AHP). 

(2) A vessel awaiting a signal change or VTS directions must keep clear of other 

vessels transiting the area. 

(d) The Eighty-one Mile Point VTS Special Area consists of navigable waters of the 

LMR between 167.5 miles AHP and 187.9 miles AHP. 

(e) Additional Eighty-one Mile Point VTS Special Area Operating Requirements. The following 

additional requirements are applicable in the Eighty-one Mile Point VTS Special Area: 
183 

(1) Prior to proceeding upriver past 167.5 miles AHP, Sunshine Bridge, vessels 

must contact VTS New Orleans on VHF Channel 5A to check-in. Vessels must 

provide name and destination, confirm proper operation of their automated 

identification system (AIS) if required under 33 CFR 164.46, and, if applicable, size 

of tow and number of loaded and empty barges. At 173.7 miles AHP, Bringier 

Point Light, ascending vessels must contact VTS New Orleans and provide a 

follow-on position check. At both check-in and follow-on position check, VTS 

New Orleans will advise the vessel on traffic approaching Eighty-one Mile Point. 

(2) Prior to proceeding downriver past 187.9 miles AHP COS-MAR Lights, vessels 

must contact VTS New Orleans on VHF Channel 5A to check-in. Vessels must 

provide name and destination, confirm proper operation of their AIS if required 

under 33 CFR 164.46, and, if applicable, size of tow and number of loaded and 

empty barges. At 183.9 miles AHP, Wyandotte Chemical Dock Lights, descending 

vessels must contact VTS New Orleans and provide a follow-on position check. At 

both check-in and follow-on position check, VTS New Orleans will advise the 

vessel on traffic approaching Eighty-one Mile Point. 

(3) All vessels getting underway between miles 167.5 and 187.9 AHP must checkin with VTS New Orleans on VHF Channel 5A immediately prior to getting 

underway and must comply with the respective ascending and descending check-in 

and follow-on points listed in paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section. 

(4) Fleet vessels must checkin with VTS New Orleans if they leave their respective 

fleet or if they move into the main channel. Fleet vessels are not required to checkin 

if they are operating exclusively within their fleet. 

(f) Reporting Points. Table 161.65(f) lists the VTS Lower Mississippi River Reporting 

Points. 

TABLE 161.65(f)—VTS LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER REPORTING POINTS

Designator Geographic name 

Geographic

description

Latitude/longitude/mile 

marker Notes 

A Algiers Canal Forebay 88.0 AHP 29°55.40′ N; 89°57.7′ W Upbound transiting Algiers Point Special Area. 

B Industrial Canal 92.7 AHP 29°57.2′ N; 90°01.68′ W Upbound transiting Algiers Point Special Area. 

C Crescent Towing Smith 

Fleet 

93.5 AHP 29°57.50′ N; 90°02.62′ W Upbound Towing vessels transiting Algiers Point 

Special Area. 

D Marlex Terminal (Naval 

Ships) 

99.0 AHP 29°54.65′ N; 90°05.87′ W Downbound transiting Algiers Point Special 

Area. 

E Huey P Long Bridge 106.1 AHP 29°56.6′ N; 90°10.1′ W Downbound transiting Algiers Point Special 

Area. 
184 

§ 161.70 Vessel Traffic Service Port Arthur. 

(a) The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the United States to the limits of 

the territorial seas bound by the following points: 30°10.00′ N., 92°37.00′ W.; then south 

to 29°10.00′ N., 92°37.00′ W.; then west to 29°10.00′ N., 93°52.25′ W.; then northwest to 

29°33.70′ N., 94°21.25′ W.; then north to 30°10.00′ N., 94°21.25′ W.; then east along the 

30°10′ N. latitude to the origination point. 

NOTE: Although mandatory participation in VTS Port Arthur is limited to the area within the navigable waters 

of the United States, prospective users are encouraged to report at the safe water marks in order to facilitate 

vessel traffic management in the VTS Area and to receive advisories or navigational assistance. 

(b) Precautionary areas.

TABLE 161.70(b)—VTS PORT ARTHUR PRECAUTIONARY AREAS

Precautionary area name Radius 

Center point 

latitude 

Center point 

longitude 

Petco Bend(1) 2000 yds 30°00.80′ N. 93°57.60′ W. 

Black Bayou(1) 2000 yds 30°00.00′ N. 93°46.20′ W. 

Orange Cut(1) 2000 yds 30°03.25′ N. 93°43.20′ W. 

Neches River Intersection(1) 2000 yds 29°58.10′ N. 93°51.25′ W. 

Texaco Island Intersection(1) 2000 yds 29°49.40′ N. 94°57.55′ W. 

Sabine-Neches Waterway N/A All waters of the Sabine-Neches Waterway between the Texaco Island Precautionary Area 

and the Humble Island Precautionary Area. 

1

 Precautionary Area encompasses a circular area of the radius denoted around the center point with the 

exception of the Sabine-Neches Waterway. 

(c) Reporting points (Inbound). 

TABLE 161.70(c)—INBOUND

Designator Geographic name Geographic description 

Latitude/ 

longitude Notes 

1 Sabine Bank Channel “SB” Buoy Sabine Bank Sea Buoy 29°25.00′ N. 

93°40.00′ W. 

Sailing Plan Report 

2 Sabine Pass Buoys “29/30” Sabine Pass Buoys “29/30” 29°35.90′ N. 

93°48.20′ W. 

3 Port Arthur Canal Light “43” Keith Lake 29°46.50′ N. 

93°56.47′ W. 

4 North Forty GIWW Mile 279 North Forty 29°56.40′ N. 

93°52.10′ W. 

5 FINA Highline Neches River Light “19” FINA Highline 29°59.10′ N. 

93°54.30′ W. 

6 Ready Reserve Fleet Highline Channel at Cove Mid-Point 30°00.80′ N. 

93°59.90′ W. 

7 Sabine River MM 268 268 Highline 30°02.20′ N. 

93°44.30′ W. 
185 

(d) Reporting points (Outbound). 

TABLE 161.70(d)—OUTBOUND

Designator Geographic name Geographic description 

Latitude/ 

longitude Notes 

1 Sabine River Light “2” Black Bayou 30°00.00′ N. 

93°46.25′ W. 

2 Ready Reserve Fleet Highline Channel at Cove Mid-Point 30°00.80′ N. 

93°59.90′ W. 

3 FINA Highline Neches River Light “19” FINA Highline 29°59.09′ N. 

93°54.30′ W. 

4 GIWW Mile 285 The School House 29°52.70′ N.

93°55.55′ W. 

Sector Shift

5 Port Arthur Canal Light “43” Keith Lake 29°46.50′ N. 

93°56.47′ W. 

6 Sabine Pass Buoys “29/30” Sabine Pass Buoys “29/30” 29°35.90′ N. 

93°48.20′ W. 

7 Sabine Bank Channel “SB” Buoy Sabine Bank Sea Buoy 29°25.00′ N. 

93°40.00′ W. 

Final Report 

(e) Reporting points (Eastbound). 

TABLE 161.70(e)—EASTBOUND (ICW) 

Designator Geographic name Geographic description 

Latitude/ 

longitude Notes 

1 GIWW Mile 295 ICW MM 295 29°47.25′ N. 

94°01.10′ W. 

Sailing Plan Report. 

2 North Forty GIWW Mile 279 North Forty 29°56.40′ N.

93°52.10′ W. 

3 Sabine River MM 268 268 Highline 30°02.20′ N. 

93°44.30′ W. 

4 GIWW Mile 260 260 Highline 30°03.50′ N. 

93°37.50′ W. 

Final Report. 

(f) Reporting points (Westbound). 

TABLE 161.70(f)—WESTBOUND (ICW) 

Designator Geographic name Geographic description 

Latitude/ 

longitude Notes 

1 GIWW Mile 260 260 Highline 30°03.50′ N. 

93°37.50′ W. 

Sailing Plan Report. 

2 Sabine River Light “2” Black Bayou 30°00.03′ N. 

93°46.18′ W. 

3 GIWW Mile 285 The School House 29°52.71′ N.

93°55.55′ W. 

Sector Shift.

4 GIWW Mile 295 ICW MM 295 29°46.20′ N. 

94°02.60′ W. 

Final Report. 
186 

(g) Reporting points (Offshore Safety Fairway). 

TABLE 161.70(g)—OFFSHORE SAFETY FAIRWAY

Designator Geographic name Geographic description 

Latitude/ 

longitude Notes 

1 Sabine Pass Safety Fairway—East East Dogleg 29°35.00′ N. 

93°28.00′ W. 

2 Sabine Pass Safety Fairway—West West Dogleg 29°28.00′ N. 

93°58.00′ W. 
Table 1 to § 161.12(c) – VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring 

(a)

Center 

−MMSI1 

 Call Sign 

Designated frequency 

(Channel Designation) 

—purpose2

Monitoring area 3, 4

Berwick Bay 

—03669950 

 

 Berwick Traffic 156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) The waters south of 29°45' N., west of 91°10' W., north of 29°37' N., and east of 91°18' W. 

Buzzards Bay 

 Buzzards Bay Control 5 156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) 

 The waters east and north of a line drawn from the southern tangent of Sakonnet Point, Rhode Island, in approximate position latitude 41°27.20′ N., longitude 

71°11.70′ W., to the Buzzards Bay Entrance Light in approximate position latitude 41°23.48′ N., longitude 71°02.5′ W., and then to the southwestern tangent 

of Cuttyhunk Island, Massachusetts, at approximate position latitude 41°24.60′ N., longitude 70°57.00′ W., and including all of the Cape Cod Canal to its eastern 

entrance, except that the area of New Bedford harbor within the confines (north of) the hurricane barrier, and the passages through the Elizabeth Islands, is 

not considered to be “Buzzards Bay”. 

Houston-Galveston 

—003669954 The navigable waters north of 29° N., west of 94°20' W., south of 29°49' N., and east of 95°20' W. 

 Houston Traffic 

 Houston Traffic 

156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) 

156.250 MHz (Ch. 5A) 

—For Sailing Plans only 

156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) 

156.250 MHz (Ch. 5A) 

—For Sailing Plans only 

The navigable waters north of a line extending due west from the southern most end of Exxon Dock #1 (20°43.37' N., 95°01.27' W.).

The navigable waters south of a line extending due west from the southern most end of Exxon Dock #1 (29°43.37' N., 95°01.27' W.) 

Los Angeles/Long 

Beach

 

 San Pedro Traffic 156.700 MHz (Ch.14) Vessel Movement Reporting System Area: The navigable waters within a 25 nautical mile radius of Point Fermin Light (33°42.3' N., 118°17.6' W.). 

Louisville

 Louisville Traffic 156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) The waters of the Ohio River between McAlpine Locks (Mile 606) and Twelve Mile Island (Mile 593), only when the McAlpine upper pool gauge is at 

approximately 13.0 feet or above. 

Lower Mississippi 

River6 

—0036699952 

 

 New Orleans Traffic 156.700 MHz (Ch.11) 

 The navigable waters of the Lower Mississippi River below 29°55.3′ N 089°55.6′ W (Saxonholm Light) at 86.0 miles Above Head of Passes (AHP), extending 

down river to Southwest Pass, and, within a 12 nautical mile radius around 28°54.3′ N 089°25.7′ W (Southwest Pass Entrance Light at 20.1 miles Below Head 

of Passes. 

 New Orleans Traffic 156.600 MHz (Ch.12) 

 The navigable waters of the Lower Mississippi River bounded on the north by a line drawn perpendicular on the river at 29°55′30′′ N and 090°12′46′′ W 

(Upper Twelve Mile Point) at 109.0 miles AHP and on the south by a line drawn perpendicularly at 29°55.3′ N 089°55.6′ W (Saxonholm Light) at 86.0 miles 

AHP. 

 New Orleans Traffic 156.600 MHz (Ch.05A) The navigable waters of the Lower Mississippi River below 30°38.7′ N 091°17.5′ W (Port Hudson Light) at 254.5 miles AHP bounded on the south by a line 

drawn perpendicular on the river at 29°55′30′′ N and 090°12′46′′ W (Upper Twelve Mile Point) at 109.0 miles AHP. 

 187 
Table 1 to § 161.12(c) – VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring 

Center 

−MMSI1 

 Call Sign 

Designated frequency 

(Channel Designation) 

—purpose2

Monitoring area 3, 4

New York 

—003669951

 

 New York Traffic 

156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) 

—For Sailing Plans only 

156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) 

—For vessels at anchor 

 The area consists of the navigable waters of the Lower New York Bay bounded on the east by a line drawn from Norton Point to Breezy Point; on the south 

by a line connecting the entrance buoys at the Ambrose Channel, Swash Channel, and Sandy Hook Channel to Sandy Hook Point; and on the southeast 

including the waters of Sandy Hook Bay south to a line drawn at latitude 40°25' N; then west in the Raritan Bay to the Raritan River Railroad Bridge, then north 

into waters of the Arthur Kill and Newark Bay to the Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge at latitude 40°41.9’ N; and then east including the waters of the Kill Van Kull 

and the Upper New York Bay north to a line drawn east-west from the Holland Tunnel ventilator shaft at latitude 40°43.7’ N, longitude 74°01.6' W, in the 

Hudson River; and then continuing east including the waters of the East River to the Throgs Neck Bridge, excluding the Harlem River. 

 New York Traffic 156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) 

 The navigable waters of the Lower New York Bay west of a line drawn from Norton Point to Breezy Point; and north of a line connecting the entrance buoys 

of Ambrose Channel, Swash Channel, and Sandy Hook Channel, to Sandy Hook Point; on the southeast including the waters of the Sandy Hook Bay south to 

a line drawn at latitude 40°25' N; then west into the waters of Raritan Bay East Reach to a line drawn from Great Kills Light south through Raritan Bay East 

Reach LGB #14 to Comfort PT, NJ; then north including the waters of the Upper New York Bay south of 40°42.40' N (Brooklyn Bridge) and 40°43.70' N 

(Holland Tunnel Ventilator Shaft); west through the KVK into the Arthur Kill north of 40°38.25' N (Arthur Kill Railroad Bridge); then north into the waters 

of the Newark Bay, south of 40°41.95' N (Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge). 

 New York Traffic 156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) 

 The navigable waters of the Raritan Bay south to a line drawn at latitude 40°26' N; then west of a line drawn from Great Kills Light south through the Raritan 

Bay East Reach LGB #14 to Point Comfort, NJ; then west to the Raritan River Railroad Bridge; and north including the waters of the Arthur Kill to 40°28.25' 

N (Arthur Kill Railroad Bridge); including the waters of the East River north of 40°42.40' N (Brooklyn Bridge) to the Throgs Neck Bridge, excluding the 

Harlem River. 

Port Arthur—003669955

 Port Arthur Traffic 156.050 MHz (Ch. 01A) The navigable waters of the Sabine-Neches Canal south of 29°52.70′ N.; Port Arthur Canal; Sabine Pass Channel; Sabine Bank Channel; Sabine Outer Bar 

Channel; the offshore safety fairway; and the ICW from High Island to its intersection with the Sabine-Neches Canal. 

 Port Arthur Traffic 156.275 MHz (Ch 65A) The navigable waters of the Neches River; Sabine River; and Sabine-Neches Waterway north of 29°52.70′ N.; and the ICW from its intersection with the 

Sabine River to MM 260. 

 Port Arthur Traffic 156.675 MHz (Ch 73)6 The navigable waters of the Calcasieu Channel; Calcasieu River Channel; and the ICW from MM 260 to MM 191. 

Prince William Sound 

—003669958 

 Valdez Traffic 156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) The navigable waters south of 61°05' N., east of 147°20' W., north of 60° N., and west of 146°30' W.; and, all navigable waters in Port Valdez. 

Puget Sound7 

 Seattle Traffic 

—003669957 156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) The waters of Puget Sound, Hood Canal and adjacent waters south of a line connecting Nodule Point and Bush Point in Admiralty Inlet and south of a line drawn due east from the southernmost tip of Possession Point on Whidbey Island to the shoreline. 

 Seattle Traffic 

—003669957 156.250 MHz (Ch. 5A) 

 The U.S. waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca east of 124°40.00′ W. including waters south and east of a line drawn from Church Point on Vancouver Island, 

to Race Rocks Light, due east to the intersection of the U.S./Canadian border at 48°17.88’ N. / 123°14.1’ W., north-easterly to Hein Bank in position 48°21.094’ 

N. / 123°02.672’ W., northerly to Cattle Point Light on San Juan Island, along the shoreline to Lime Kiln Light, to Kellett Bluff Light on Henry Island, along 

the shoreline to the tip of McCracken Point at the northernmost point of Henry Island, to the southernmost point on Stuart Island in position 48°39.46’ N. / 

123°11.08’ W., along the shoreline to Turn Point Light, to Sandy Point on Waldron Island, along the shoreline to Point Hammond, to Patos Island Light, to 

Alden Bank in position 48°50.39’ N. / 122°52.227’ W., then due north to Boundary Bay in position 49°00.125’ N. / 122°52.228’ W., then due east along the 

international boundary to the shoreline in Semiahmoo Bay line connecting Nodule Point and Bush Point and all waters east of Whidbey Island north of a line 

drawn due east from the southernmost tip of Possession Point on Whidbey Island to the shoreline. 

 Prince Rupert Traffic 

—003160013 156.725 MHz (Ch. 74) The waters west of 124°40.00' W. within 12 nautical miles of the coast of Vancouver Island including the waters north of 48°00.00’ N., and east of 125°15.00’W. 188 
Table 1 to § 161.12(c) – VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring 

 

Center 

−MMSI

1 

 Call Sign 

Designated frequency 

(Channel Designation) 

—purpose2 

Monitoring area 3, 4 

 Victoria Traffic 

—03160010 156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) 

 The waters of the Strait of Georgia, including Vancouver Harbor, Boundary Pass, and Haro Strait north and west a line drawn from Church Point on 

Vancouver Island, to Race Rocks Light, due easterly to the intersection of the U.S./Canadian border at 48°17.883’N. / 123°14.1’ W., north-easterly to Hein 

Bank in position 48°21.093’ N. / 123°02.762’ W., northerly to Cattle Point Light on San Juan Island, along the shoreline to Lime Kiln Light, to Kellett Bluff 

Light on Henry Island, along the shoreline to the tip of McCracken Point at the northernmost point of Henry Island, to the southernmost point on Stuart 

Island in position 48°39.467’ N. / 123°11.083’ W., along the shoreline to Turn Point Light, to Sandy Point on Waldron Island, along the shoreline to Point 

Hammond, to Patos Island Light, to Alden Bank in position 48°50.389’ N. / 122°52.227’ W., then due north to Boundary Bay in position 49°00.125’ N. / 

122°52.227’ W., then due east along the international boundary to the shoreline in Semiahmoo Bay. 

San Francisco 

—003669956 

 San Francisco Traffic 156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) 

 The navigable waters of the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area, the navigable waters shoreward of the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area 

east of 122°42.0' W. and north of 37°40.0' N. extending eastward through the Golden Gate, and the navigable waters of San Francisco Bay and as far east as 

the port of Stockton on the San Joaquin River, as far north as the port of Sacramento on the Sacramento River. 

 San Francisco Traffic 156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) The navigable waters within a 38 nautical mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37°55.8' N., 122°34.6' W.) west of 122°42.0' W. and south of 37°40.0' N and 

excluding the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area. 

St. Marys River 

—003669953 

 Soo Traffic 156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) The waters of the St. Marys River between 45°57' N. (De Tour Reef Light) and 46°38.7' N. (lle Parisienne Light), except the St. Marys Falls Canal and those 

navigable waters east of a line from 46°04.16' N. and 46°01.57' N. (La Pointe to Sims Point in Potagannissing Bay and Worsley Bay). 

NOTES:

1 Maritime Mobile Service Identifier (MMSI) is a unique nine-digit number assigned that identifies ship stations, ship earth stations, coast stations, coast earth stations, and group calls for use by a digital selective calling 

(DSC) radio, an INMARSAT ship earth station or AIS. AIS requirements are set forth in §§161.21 and 164.46 of this subchapter. The requirements set forth in §§161.21 and 164.46 of this subchapter apply in those 

areas denoted with a MMSI number, except for Louisville and Los Angeles/Long Beach. 

2 In the event of a communication failure, difficulties or other safety factors, the Center may direct or permit a user to monitor and report on any other designated monitoring frequency or the bridge-to-bridge 

navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz (Channel 13) or 156.375 MHz (Ch. 67), to the extent that doing so provides a level of safety beyond that provided by other means. The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 

156.650 MHz (Ch. 13), is used in certain monitoring areas where the level of reporting does not warrant a designated frequency. 

3 All geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) are expressed in North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83). 

4 Some monitoring areas extend beyond navigable waters. Although not required, users are strongly encouraged to maintain a listening watch on the designated monitoring frequency in these areas. Otherwise, they 

are required to maintain watch as stated in 47 CFR 80.148. 

5 In addition to the vessels denoted in section 161.16 of this chapter, requirements set forth in subpart B of 33 CFR part 161 also apply to any vessel transiting VMRS Buzzards Bay required to carry a bridge-to-bridge 

radiotelephone by part 26 of this chapter. 

6

 Until otherwise directed, full VTS services will not be available in the Calcasieu Channel, Calcasieu River Channel, and the ICW from MM 260 to MM 191. Vessels may contact Port Arthur Traffic on the designated 

VTS frequency to request advisories, but are not required to monitor the VTS frequency in this sector. 189 
Table 1 to § 161.12(c) – VTS and VMRS Centers, Call Signs/MMSI, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring 

7 A Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service was established by the United States and Canada within adjoining waters. The appropriate Center administers the rules issued by both nations; however, enforces only its own 

set of rules within its jurisdiction. Note, the bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz (Ch. 13), is not so designated in Canadian waters, therefore users are encouraged and permitted to make passing 

arrangements on the designated monitoring frequencies. 190 
NOTES 

 
NOTES